20.

tNavigator
Release Notes

Rock Flow Dynamics

April 2020
 20.1

Copyright Notice
Rock Flow Dynamics r (RFD), 2004–2020. All rights reserved. This document is the intel-
lectual property of RFD. It is not allowed to copy this document, to store it in an information
retrieval system, distribute, translate and retransmit in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of RFD.

Trade Mark
RFD, the RFD logotype and tNavigator r product, and other words or symbols used to identify
the products and services described herein are trademarks, trade names or service marks of
RFD. It is not allowed to imitate, use, copy trademarks, in whole or in part, without the prior
written consent of the RFD. Graphical design, icons and other elements of design may be
trademarks and/or trade names of RFD and are not allowed to use, copy or imitate, in whole
or in part, without the prior written consent of the RFD. Other company, product, and service
names are the properties of their respective owners.

Security Notice
The software’s specifications suggested by RFD are recommendations and do not limit the
configurations that may be used to operate the software. It is recommended to operate the
software in a secure environment whether such software is operated on a single system or
across a network. The Licensee is responsible for configuring and maintaining networks and/or
system(s) in a secure manner. If you have any questions about security requirements for the
software, please contact your local RFD representative.

Disclaimer
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by RFD. RFD assumes no responsibility for any error that
may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed
or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Since the software, which is described in the present document is constantly improved, you
may find descriptions based on previous versions of the software.

2
 20.1

1. tNavigator 20.1
The key new features in tNavigator 20.1 are:
• Default settings of simulator have been changed:
– A new calculation mode has been implemented: equations for wells with a large
number of perforations are saved in the Jacobi matrix as separate equations. This
significantly speeds up the calculation of models with hydraulic fractures. Since
version 20.1 users don’t need to enable the option WELLEQUATIONS as it is
done automatically, and only for the wells with a large number of perforations.
– The following default parameter is modified:
∗ DTPRED option is switched on for thermal models.
– A new option to reduce material balance error on Newton iteration has been im-
plemented (keyword RUNCTRL option MBERRCTRL).
• FULLIMP calculation is supported for compositional models in full GPU mode (option
GPU_MODE=4).
• In workflow of Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty module the following op-
tions are available: loops for variants in the group may be created; one experiment may
be started from the results of another; string variables may be used in object names.
• In Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty module any calculated parameters (rates,
watercut, etc) may be visualized on 2D using MDS and PCA. Variants may be clustered
by any parameters taking into account selected time interval.
• In Geology Designer and Model Designer Geometry Objects tree is updated: Object
filter is available to show/hide objects by type.
• Workflows of Network Designer, Well Designer and PVT Designer may be called from
a workflow in Model Designer and Geology Designer.
• In Geology Designer object-based simulation has been implemented.
• In Well Designer the size (maximum/minimum length) and segment deviation angle
may be set for multisegment well model.
• In PVT Designer Herning and Zipperer (HZYT) correlation is supported for viscosity
calculation.
• Geology and Model Designer may be used in view results mode using the license of
Graphical Interface. In this mode it is possible to view data, saving changes is not
available.
• Network Designer can be started on cluster systems. A license of Network Designer is
required for each cluster node to run integrated model on a cluster (previously Network
Designer used to run on just one node, so only one Network Designer license was
required for the master node).

1. tNavigator 20.1 3
 20.1

1.1. tNavigator kernel (Simulator)

The tNavigator kernel 20.1 supports the following new functionality:
GPU calculations:
• FULLIMP calculation is supported for compositional models in full GPU mode (option
GPU_MODE=4).

• GPU calculation of relative permeabilities and saturations for WAG hysteresis is now
supported.

• Calculations of water viscosity for polymer/salt solutions; for polymer solution with
temperature option and for polymer/salt solutions with temperature option are supported
(keywords PLYVISCS, PLYVISCT, PLYVISCST).

• Smoothing of relative phase permeabilities is supported (keyword KRSMOOTH).

• Calculation of relative phase permeabilities and capillary pressures for miscible treat-
ment is supported for compositional models (keyword MISCIBLE).

• Models with SALT option may be calculated in full GPU mode (option GPU_MODE=4).

• Models with API option may be calculated in full GPU mode (option GPU_MODE=4).

For models in E1 and E3 format:

• Cationic exchange reaction between the rock, surfactant and salt solution with taking
into account multiple components of salt is supported (keywords ECLMC, SURFESAL,
IONXSURF, OINXROCK, PLYSAL).

• Analytical model of adsorption is supported (keyword ADSORP).

• WMMW mnemonic may be used in UDQ.

• LGR may be used in multireservoir models defined via NUMRES keyword.

• Grid data in GSG format may be used (keyword PETGRID).

• Directional scaling for RP and saturation table end-points is supported (option DIRECT
of the keyword ENDSCALE), including:

– Connate water saturations for drainage (keywords SWLX, SWLX-, SWLY, SWLY-,
SWLZ, SWLZ-) and imbibition (keywords ISWLX, ISWLX-, ISWLY, ISWLY-,
ISWLZ, ISWLZ-) processes.
– Maximum water saturations for drainage (keywords SWUX, SWUX-, SWUY,
SWUY-, SWUZ, SWUZ-) and imbibition (keywords ISWUX, ISWUX-, ISWUY,
ISWUY-, ISWUZ, ISWUZ-) processes.

1.1. tNavigator kernel (Simulator) 4

 20.1

– Critical water saturations for drainage (keywords SWCRX, SWCRX-, SWCRY,

SWCRY-, SWCRZ, SWCRZ-) and imbibition (keywords ISWCRX, ISWCRX-,
ISWCRY, ISWCRY-, ISWCRZ, ISWCRZ-) processes.
– Connate gas saturations for drainage (keywords SGLX, SGLX-, SGLY, SGLY-,
SGLZ, SGLZ-) and imbibition (keywords ISGLX, ISGLX-, ISGLY, ISGLY-, IS-
GLZ, ISGLZ-) processes.
– Maximum gas saturations for drainage (keywords SGUX, SGUX-, SGUY, SGUY-,
SGUZ, SGUZ-) and imbibition (keywords ISGUX, ISGUX-, ISGUY, ISGUY-,
ISGUZ, ISGUZ-) processes.
– Critical gas saturations for drainage (keywords SGCRX, SGCRX-, SGCRY,
SGCRY-, SGCRZ, SGCRZ-) and imbibition (keywords ISGCRX, ISGCRX-, IS-
GCRY, ISGCRY-, ISGCRZ, ISGCRZ-) processes.
– Critical oil-in-water saturations for drainage (keywords SOWCRX, SOWCRX-,
SOWCRY, SOWCRY-, SOWCRZ, SOWCRZ-) and imbibition (keywords ISOWCRX,
ISOWCRX-, ISOWCRY, ISOWCRY-, ISOWCRZ, ISOWCRZ-) processes.
– Critical oil-in-gas saturations for drainage (keywords SOGCRX, SOGCRX-,
SOGCRY, SOGCRY-, SOGCRZ, SOGCRZ-) and imbibition (keywords ISOGCRX,
ISOGCRX-, ISOGCRY, ISOGCRY-, ISOGCRZ, ISOGCRZ-) processes.
– Relative permeability of water at maximum water saturation for drainage (key-
words KRWX, KRWX-, KRWY, KRWY-, KRWZ, KRWZ-) and imbibition (key-
words IKRWX, IKRWX-, IKRWY, IKRWY-, IKRWZ, IKRWZ-) processes.
– Relative permeability of gas at maximum gas saturation for drainage (keywords
KRGX, KRGX-, KRGY, KRGY-, KRGZ, KRGZ-) and imbibition (keywords
IKRGX, IKRGX-, IKRGY, IKRGY-, IKRGZ, IKRGZ-) processes.
– Relative permeability of water at residual oil saturation (or residual gas in a
gas-water case) for drainage (keywords KRWRX, KRWRX-, KRWRY, KRWRY-,
KRWRZ, KRWRZ-) and imbibition (keywords IKRWRX, IKRWRX-, IKRWRY,
IKRWRY-, IKRWRZ, IKRWRZ-) processes.
– Relative permeability of gas at residual oil saturation (or critical water in a
gas-water case) for drainage (keywords KRGRX, KRGRX-, KRGRY, KRGRY-,
KRGRZ, KRGRZ-) and imbibition (keywords IKRGRX, IKRGRX-, IKRGRY,
IKRGRY-, IKRGRZ, IKRGRZ-) processes.
– Relative permeability of oil at maximum oil saturation for drainage (keywords
KROX, KROX-, KROY, KROY-, KROZ, KROZ-) and imbibition (keywords
IKROX, IKROX-, IKROY, IKROY-, IKROZ, IKROZ-) processes.
– Relative permeability of oil at critical water saturation for drainage (key-
words KRORWX, KRORWX-, KRORWY, KRORWY-, KRORWZ, KRORWZ-)
and imbibition (keywords IKRORWX, IKRORWX-, IKRORWY, IKRORWY-,
IKRORWZ, IKRORWZ-) processes.

1.1. tNavigator kernel (Simulator) 5

 20.1

– Relative permeability of oil at critical gas saturation for drainage (keywords

KRORGX, KRORGX-, KRORGY, KRORGY-, KRORGZ, KRORGZ-) and im-
bibition (keywords IKRORGX, IKRORGX-, IKRORGY, IKRORGY-, IKRORGZ,
IKRORGZ-) processes.

For models in IM, ST, GE formats:

• Pressure gradient may be set for pressure drop calculation between neighboring perfo-
rations in the wellbore (keyword LAYERGRAD).

• Total fluid rate (including water, oil, gas phase) may be used as a constraint for ST
models (option STF of the keyword OPERATE).

• Different approaches are available for pressure drop calculation between layers in the
wellbore (the keyword HEAD-METHOD: option ZERO-HEAD – pressure drop is equal
to zero; GRAVITY – pressure drop is calculated via hydrostatics).

• A separate well index multiplier may be calculated and applied to wells so that the
defined bottomhole pressure and surface rate will match under the current reservoir and
wellbore conditions (keyword SKIN-TUNER).

• Numerical characteristics for triggers may be used in GE models (MPWS, MPVS,

MPLS).

• For models in IM format, tracers are supported (keywords TRCR-DEF, TRCR-

INJCONC).

• For models in ST format, multiple injection of water, oil and gas is supported
(keyword *INCOMP options WATER-GAS-Z/WATER-OIL-Z/WATER-GAS-OIL-Z,
WATER-GAS/WATER-OIL/WATER-GAS-OIL).

For models in MO format:

• Coordinate system MAP may be chosen in the keywords TTAB/TFIL.

• Grid coarsening is available (keywords COARsen and CXGR/CYGR/CZGR).

Special options:
• Default settings of simulator have been changed:

– A new calculation mode has been implemented: equations for wells with a large
number of perforations are saved in the Jacobi matrix as separate equations. This
significantly speeds up the calculation of models with hydraulic fractures. Since
version 20.1 users don’t need to enable the option WELLEQUATIONS as it is
done automatically, and only for the wells with a large number of perforations
(more than 30 for black-oil models, more than 20 for compositional models).
– The following default parameter is modified:

1.1. tNavigator kernel (Simulator) 6

 20.1

∗ DTPRED option is switched on for thermal models.

– A new option to reduce material balance error on Newton iteration has been im-
plemented (keyword RUNCTRL option MBERRCTRL).
– To get the calculation results as before version 20.1 you should use the settings
WELLEQUATIONS 0, MBERRCTRL 0, DTPRED 0.

• Python script in SCHEDULE section may be started at the beginning or at the end of
the time step (option on_start added to script parameters script_set_options()).

• TNAVCTRL RESGEO_DIAGNOSTIC option may be used to locate the problems in

geomechanical model run.

• Table definition of water and polymer elongational properties for viscosity in UVM
depending on salt and polymer concentration is supported (keyword PLYELVSCS).

• Analytical model of specifying water and polymer properties in UVM is supported

(keywords PLYVISCA, PLYSHEARA, PLYELVMAXA, PLYELVSVA).

• Parameters 12-14 of the keyword WCONINJE may be set via UDQ.

• An algorithm for constructing a grid with LGR for hydraulic fracture model allows that
the width and length of the fracture zone of hydraulic fracture are exactly equal to the
values specified by the user (in cases where the fracture is parallel to the coordinate
axes).

• New option is available – keyword TNAVCTRL, option FRACTURE_BUILD_LOGIC

(UNSTRUCTURED_SPARSE_GRID). New logic is used to build grid in the models
with hydraulic fractures, which requires less RAM and creates less LGRs for fractures
that are not parallel to coordinate axes.

Data input-output:
• SUMMARY mnemonics:

– Mnemonics corresponding to the perforations inside local grid refinement may be

used (LC*).
– Block data mnemonics are available: BGSAT (BSGAS), BDENO (BODEN),
BDENW (BWDEN), BDENG (BGDEN), BPBUB, BKRW (BWKR), BKRO
(BOKR), BKRG (BGKR), B{O,W,G}KR{I,J,K}[-], BVWAT (BWVIS), BVOIL
(BOVIS), BVGAS (BGVIS), BWPC, BGPC, BRS, BRV, BRPV.
– Mean molecular weight of wellstream WMMW may be used.

• Other:

– Support for writing RFT and PLT files has been extended (keyword WRFTPLT).

1.1. tNavigator kernel (Simulator) 7

 20.1

1.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator Graphical User Interface 20.1:

• Search by mnemonics (FOIP etc.) is available in the list in Graph Templates when the
full names of graphs are displayed.

• Line color and ticks color for axes may be set in Graph Templates.

• Integration with libraries Pandas and NumPy is available in Graph Calculator.

• Aquifer functions may be used in Graph Calculator.

• Calculation results of several cases may be deleted in one go (main window → Mod-
eling → Simulation Results → Clear Results, choose several .sdata files).

• Visualization of properties DIFFMMF, MLANG, LANGMPL is available.

• PVTG tables may be visualized with a choice of pressure or RV dependence.

• Quick snapshot may be created to copy the picture to clipboard (button on the right
panel Create Snapshot).

1.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty

In Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 20.1:

• A unified graphical interface for this module has been implemented. The new interface is
similar in style with Model Designer, Geology Designer, Simulator Graphical Interface.

• Any calculated parameters (rates, watercut, etc) may be visualized on 2D using multi-
dimensional scaling (tab 2D → MDS) and principal component analysis (tab 2D →
PCA). Variants may be clustered by any parameters taking into account selected time
interval.

• Visualization of graphs for components (for compositional models) and tracers is avail-
able in Graph Calculator.

• Custom user history may be loaded and visualized on graphs (tab Objective function →
Custom history). Loaded history may be used as a parameter in objective function.

• Specifying variables and algorithms:

– Variables may be used in parameters of RESTART keyword.

– String variables that take names of selected objects from tree for values may be
created in Geology and Model Designer (right-click on Geometry objects, then
select Create variable from selected objects).

1.2. Graphical User Interface 8

 20.1

– New option to add string variables is available in Workflow (Add variable →

Type → String). A set of variable names is automatically generated using the
specified template with a counter for the generated names.

• Workflow:

– The following options are available: loops for variants in the group may be created;
one experiment may be started from the results of another; string variables in the
objects names may be used.

1.4. Geology Designer

In Geology Designer 20.1:

• (Geometry objects) tree and calculations:

– Search for objects by name is available.

– Object filters are available to filter objects by types.
– Several calculation windows may be displayed simultaneously (Extract Calcula-
tion button in the top right corner in the calculations window).
– New hot keys are available: F2 – rename object, Del – delete, Alt+C – open
Calculations window.

• Visualization:

– Rotation points may be moved by arrows in 3D (3D → create a new point using
the button Rotation point → Press on the point → Move the point along the
arrows that appear → the arrow that is used for moving is highlighted with a bold
line).
– Different visualization styles are available for polygons on 2D (solid line, dashed
line, dotted line, dash dot line, dash dot dot line).
– Well attributes may be displayed on the Well Section tab.
– The number of decimal digits that is displayed for minimum and maximum values
on log curve headers may be set for the Well Section tab (Settings → Label
settings → Fraction digits).

• Seismic:

– Default seismic reference datum may be set (0 time on the seismic in depth units)
(Settings menu → Coordinate System Settings → Default seismic reference
datum).
– All text headers may be previewed in seismic surveys import (Text header tab –
the box to choose header number is available).

1.4. Geology Designer 9

 20.1

– Parameters of seismic surveys, seismic faults and horizons may be modified

(Seismic → Seismic survey 3D → Set seismic survey parameters and Seis-
mic → Seismic faults (horizons) → Set seismic fault (horizon) parameters).
– Cosine of the phase attribute may be calculated (Seismic survey 3D or 2D →
Calculate attributes → Cosine of phase).
– Spectral decomposition attribute may be calculated for 2D seismic surveys
(Seismic survey 2D → Calculate attributes → Spectral decomposition).
– Seismic Slices may be created by seismic horizons (right click on seismic survey
name in 3D → Add Slice → Seismic Slice for seismic horizon, then choose
horizon in the settings).
– Seismic attributes may be calculated dynamically on inlines and crosslines without
new cube creating (right mouse click on the seismic survey 3D → Add Slice →
attribute inline or crossline, then choose attribute in the settings).
– The density of trace visualization may be adjusted for seismic surveys on 2D,
3D, Seismic and Cross-Section tabs (Seismic survey 3D → Settings of seismic
slices → Trace step).

• Well attributes:

– The option to handle the absence of the log curve and the lower marker is available
in the calculation of the well attribute (Wells Attributes → Average log between
marker (Well Attribute)).
– TVT and TST may be calculated by marker and horizon (Wells Attributes →
TVT, TST calculation by marker and horizon (Well Attribute)).

• Well data:

– Well branches may be deleted separately in the Well Table (Wells Table → Re-
move Wells).
– Angles are preserved if the inclinometry data is imported. Angles are saved, can
be visualized and used in exported data (Wells → Import).
– Column coloring is implemented in the Well Table tab: non-editable (recalculated)
data is displayed in grey.

• Markers:

– Several options are available to append markers during the import: append, keeping
existing values; append, replacing existing values; append, renaming markers by at-
taching suffix if values exist, remove all markers data before loading (Markers →
Import → How to append markers).

• Well logs:

1.4. Geology Designer 10

 20.1

– Logs may be created from trajectory properties (using steps in MD) (Well Logs →
Create → Create log by trajectory).
– Property filters may be used to create log by Blocked Wells (Well Logs → Cre-
ate → Create log by Blocked Wells).
– Log curves may be normalized according to the values in the specified depth
interval (Well Logs → Transformations → Log normalization).
• 2D-Maps and horizons:
– The area of 2D-Maps may be calculated, the results are available in a table form
(2D-Maps → Calculate 2D-Map Area).
– Shift attributes may be generated automatically to show the quality of resulting
horizon adjustment to markers comparing to the initial state (Horizons → Trans-
formations → Horizon adjustment to markers or Pull up horizon to marker).
– The Undefined option is available in the Horizon (2D-Map) Cut & Merge cal-
culation in the Geometry Source column (Horizons or 2D-Maps → Create →
Horizon (2D-Map) Cut & Merge).
– The residual attributes (pointsets) may be preserved or overwritten in the local
horizon and map update (Horizons or 2D-Maps → Transformations → Local
Horizon (2D-Map) Update).
– ABOS interpolation algorithm is available (Horizons or 2D-Maps → Create →
Interpolation or Universal interpolation → ABOS).
– Global mean value can be set optionally for 2D-Kriging algorithm (Horizons or
2D-Maps → Create → Interpolation or Universal interpolation or → Trans-
formations → Local Horizon (2D-Map) Update).
– The area near faults may be ignored in 2D-Map creation by property (2D-Maps →
Create → 2D-Map by Property).
– Sets of horizons may be truncated according to the rules of structural model for
these surfaces (Horizons → Create → Create horizons by truncation rules).
• Polygons:
– New types of objects may be taken into account (wellheads, markers, well at-
tributes) to create polygons around objects (Polygons → Create → Offsets by
points and polygons).
– The edges of polygons may be sub-splitted with a specified step or sub-cuts number
without any smoothing (Polygons → Transformations → Refine polygon by
linear interpolation).
– The geometry of polygons may be simplified via Douglas-Pecker algorithm
(Polygons → Transformations → Simplify polygon).
– Polygon components may be deleted on the Cross-section tab via right mouse click
menu.

1.4. Geology Designer 11

 20.1

– Following tools have been added to interactive polygon editing:

∗ One polygon’s component may be connected to another – components merg-
ing.
∗ Polygons vertexes may be selected via "Select points" option and may be
deleted later.

• Faults:

– The size of resulting faults may be determined from the source data (Faults →
Create fault by point sets → Calculate convex hull).

• Grids:

– Continuous properties may be weighted by pore volume in coarse grid calculation

(upscaling) (Grids → Create coarse grid).
– Faults may be extended to the grid boundaries when the grid is created based on
point sets or horizons and faults (option Interpolation parameters of structural
faults straightening).

• Grid Properties:

– Object-based simulation has been implemented (Properties → Interpolation →

Object-based Simulation).
– Properties may be distributed directly from Well Logs (Properties → Property
Interpolation (Zones, Regions) → SGS → Distribution).
– Indexes are assigned to connected components sequentially, starting with those
having greater number of blocks in the calculation of connected volumes
(Properties → Connected components → Connected components).

• Blocked Wells:

– Continuous or discrete log types may be set to create Blocked wells (Blocked
Wells → Create).
– Power mean averaging type may be used to create Blocked Wells.

• Contacts:

– Saturations may be displayed using a contact template (List of templates → Tem-

plate Group: Geology → Contact cell types).
– Contact types may be set when the contact is calculated from a horizon
(Contact → Create contact by horizon → Contact type).
– The entire contact surface may be visualized in addition to the contact intersection
with the grid.

• Workflow:

1.4. Geology Designer 12

 20.1

– Workflows of Network Designer, Well Designer and PVT Designer may be called
from the workflow in Model Designer and Geology Designer.
– The current workflow of a project may be saved as a file separately from the
project (Calculations and Workflows → Save Workflow).
– Grid property values for each grid block may be read or set in the custom code
(new classes are available – grid and property, and new methods for properties –
get and set).
– Access to the well trajectory data, markers and well logs is provided from Custom
code (well branches, well head coordinates, length of the trajectory, bottom hole,
access to the trajectory point by its MD, amendment in altitude, etc). New functions
are available: get_wellhead, get_bottom_hole, get_length, get_trajectory_point,
get_points get_val_at, get_list_of_args_vals, etc.

• Data analysis:

– Variograms may be built by pointsets or pointset attribute (Data analysis → Var-

iograms → Build isotropic or anisotropic variogram by pointsets or pointset
attribute).

• Geosteering:

– The Geosteering tab is updated. Geosteering objects are added to the objects tree.
In the Geosteering tab log curves are displayed for reference, planned and drilling
wells. Structure editing may be done: horizons editing, vertical displacement of the
formation between faults, rotation of horizons.

• Crossplot:

– Well markers and horizons may be compared on the crossplot.

– Information blocks on the crossplot show the current settings and visualization
modes.

1.5. Model Designer

In Model Designer 20.1:

• (Geometry objects) tree and calculations:

– Search for objects by name is available.

– Object filters are available to filter objects by types.
– Several calculation windows may be displayed simultaneously (Extract Calcula-
tion button in the top right corner in the calculations window).
– New hot keys are available: F2 – rename object, Del – delete, Alt+C – open
Calculations window.

1.5. Model Designer 13

 20.1

• Import/Export options:
– Anonymized model may be exported to a file. Wells names, groups names, faults
may be renamed and also grid properties (porosity, permeability) may be modified
(Project → Export → Export model → Anonymize Model).
– Precision may be set in grid and properties export dialogues.
– Grid parameters may be exported in different files (Grids → Export grid →
uncheck the box Save to one file).
– Comments to keywords are aligned when the model is exported.
• Visualization:
– Bubble Maps may be displayed (Settings → Wells → Bubble Maps).
– Rotation points may be moved by arrows in 3D (3D → create a new point using
the button Rotation point → Press on the point → Move the point along the
arrows that appear → the arrow that is used for moving is highlighted with a bold
line).
• Well Rules:
– A new rule Well D-factor is available (corresponds to the keyword WDFAC).
– A new rule Well RFT/PLT Data Output is available (corresponds to the keyword
WRFTPLT).
– A new rule Well injected gas nature is available (corresponds to the keyword
WINJGAS).
– A new rule Group pressure maintenance is available (corresponds to the keyword
GPMAINT).
• Well data:
– Well branches may be deleted separately in the Well Table (Wells Table → Re-
move Wells).
– Mnemonics UPTIME and IGNORE_MISSING may be used in the imported well
production tables (Wells Data → Tables → Import History - Grouped by
Wells).
– Columns with comments may be loaded or created in the Wells Data tabs (Well
Production table, Well Structure table, Group Production table).
• Workflow:
– Workflows of Network Designer, Well Designer and PVT Designer may be called
from the workflow in Model Designer and Geology Designer.
– Current workflow of the project may be saved as a file separately from the project
(Calculations and Workflows → Save Workflow).

1.5. Model Designer 14

 20.1

– A workflow script may be started automatically when the model is initialized

(before initialization) or when the model is exported (before export) (set the script
in Cases → Workflow → Run Workflow).
– Well placement optimization is available via workflow. In the dialogue Well Place-
ment Editor variables may be added to vary template configuration (length,
angle); these variables may be further used in the workflow for production op-
timization.
– Input Well Structure rule is available in the workflow.
– Grid property values for each grid block may be read or set in the custom code
(new classes are available – grid and property, and new methods for properties –
get and set).
• RP and capillary pressure Designer:
– The first implementation of RP and capillary pressure Designer is introduced
(Fluid Properties → KRP → button on the right panel Launch RP Designer).
• Other:
– Objects may be put in folders at Fluid Properties tab.
– Well bore number may be used in the Fracture Table and Fracture Stage (using a
colon after the name of the well).
• Graphs:
– Search by mnemonics (FOIP etc.) is available in the list of parameters when the
full names of graphs are displayed.
– Line color and ticks color for axes may be set.
– Integration with libraries Pandas and NumPy is available in Graph Calculator.
– Aquifer functions may be used in Graph Calculator.

1.6. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 20.1:
• Critical volume for the purpose of viscosity calculation may be imported or specified
(keyword VCRITVIS).
• Z-factor for the purpose of viscosity calculation may be imported or specified (keyword
ZCRITVIS).
• Herning and Zipperer (HZYT) correlation is supported for viscosity calculation.
• Black oil and compositional variants may be created and edited in the PVT Designer
workflow.
• Water properties may be set in compositional variant.

1.6. PVT Designer 15

 20.1

1.7. Network Designer

In Network Designer 20.1:

• Maximum velocity value may be used as a control for fluid in the Pipe (option is
available in object’s settings). Specified value is a maximal flow velocity for each
stream phase.

• Graphs for components may be visualized on the Graphs tab.

• Objects may be visualized in 2D according to their real coordinates on the Map tab.

• Objects that are inactive in the calculation may be hidden (check box Show disabled
objects on the central panel).

1.8. Well Designer

In Well Designer 20.1:

• The VFP Designer module has been rebranded as Well Designer, which more accu-
rately describes the functionality of the module (build well construction, calculate VFP,
IPR etc.).

• Size (maximum/minimum length) and segment deviation angle may be set for multiseg-
ment well model (option Use segmentation parameters on the Basic data tab).

• New object is available – Liner (check box Liner in the Casing parameters).

• Intersection point of IPR and VFP curves is visualized on VFP tab.

1.9. Licenses and license server

In tNavigator 20.1:

• License server web interface has been translated to Russian, Chinese and Spanish.

• Geology and Model Designer may be used in view results mode using the license of
Graphical Interface. In this mode it is possible to view data, saving changes is not
available.

• Network Designer can be started on cluster systems. The license of Network Designer
is required for each cluster node to run integrated model on cluster (previously Network
Designer used to run on just one node, so only one Network Designer license was
required for the master node).

1.7. Network Designer 16

 20.1

1.10. Documentation, Localization

Translations to Spanish and Chinese languages:
• The Chinese translation of all modules has been completed: graphical interface and log
messages are translated.
• The Spanish translation of all modules has been completed: graphical interface and log
messages are translated.

New training tutorials are added for tNavigator 20.1:

• Tutorials for Geology Designer:
• GD4.1 How To Start With Seismic, GD4.2 How To Interpret Horizons On Seis-
mic, GD4.3 How To Do The Time To Depth Conversion, GD4.4 How To Gen-
erate Attributes
Teapot dome open-source data is used in these tutorials (sgy 400Mb is attached to
the first tutorial).
• GD4.5. How To Model Geobodies
In this tutorial the procedure of geobodies modeling is presented: building a 3D
grid for the area of interest, creating vertical and horizontal cross-sections, inter-
pretation of geobody on the cross-sections using polygons, interpolation of the
geobody.
• Tutorials for Simulator, Model Designer:
• COMMON1.6 How To Use Python In Schedule
In this tutorial we show the Python usage in Schedule section. Scripts may be used
in model .data file (APPLYSCRIPT keyword) or created as a Well Rule in Model
Designer. The following examples of Python scripts are provided:
– Example 1. A model consists of two reservoirs. As one reservoir is exhausted,
the wells start switching to another one.
– Example 2. A reservoir contains high percentage of CO2. Sales gas should
contain up to 5% CO2. The extra CO2 is separated and injected back to the
reservoir.
– Example 3. Automatic well conversion to injection: Watercut > 95%, Max 3
wells may be converted in each group, Max 10 wells may be converted in
total.
– Example 4. Automatic closing of individual branches for multilateral well
when their production falls below threshold.
• Tutorials for Model Designer:
• How To Create Compositional Model
In this tutorial we build a compositional model using the integration of PVT De-
signer and Model Designer. The following cases are created: compositional model

1.10. Documentation, Localization 17

 20.1

with one EOS region, adding to the model a composition dependence vs depth
(COMPVD keyword), model with different equilibrium and EOS regions, gener-
ating a compositional model and setting a constant composition for blocks in one
EOS region (ZMF keyword).

1.10. Documentation, Localization 18

 20.1

2. tNavigator 19.4
The key new features in tNavigator 19.4 are:
• Multiple GPUs are now supported when running a GPU-only calculation of black oil
models.
• A 4-phase, 4-component extension of the black oil model is introduced for modeling
the miscible displacement of oil by the solvent.
• Well events in the SCHEDULE section can now be specified by means of Python scripts
(keyword APPLYSCRIPT).
• A compositional variant can now be created in PVT Designer based on the selected
model block in Simulator Graphical Interface.
• New optimization algorithm – Artificial Intelligence based on neural networks has been
added.
• Different units for XY axis and Z axis may be set in Geology and Model Designer.
• The option to form a "for" loop and "if" conditional operator from the graphic interface
is added in Geology and Model Designer.
• First implementaiton of RP and capillary pressures Designer is available.
• In Network Designer any object of surface network may be bypassed.

2.1. tNavigator kernel (Simulator)

The tNavigator kernel 19.4 supports the following new functionality:
GPU calculations:
• Multiple GPUs are now supported when running a GPU-only calculation of black oil
models.

For models in E1 and E3 format:

• Dependence of transmissibility on porosity is supported (4th and 5th parameters of the
ROCKCOMP keyword, ROCKTRMX/ROCKTRMY/ROCKTRMZ).
• Isothermic compositional models with single water phase are supported.
• 3rd argument of the THPRESFT keyword is supported. It turns off the dependence of
pressure potential on the fault’s threshold pressure, after breakthrough.
• The scaling arrays KRWH, KRWRH, IKRWH, IKRWRH can be used for models with
WAG hysteresis.
• The following scaling arrays for capillary pressure may be used: SGLPC, ISGLPC.

2. tNavigator 19.4 19
 20.1

For models in E1 format:

• A 4-phase, 4-component extension of the black oil model is introduced for modeling
the miscible displacement of oil by the solvent (keywords SOLVENT, PVDS, SSFN,
SSOL, WSOLVENT).

For models in IM, ST, GE formats:

• Hysteresis behavior of rock compressibility is implemented (CIRREVERS option of the
keyword CROCKTAB).

• Heat conductivity is made temperature-dependent and anisotropic (keywords THCON-

TAB, THCONANTAB) for ST models.

• Absolute permeability can be specified as a function of porosity (keywords PERMCK,

PERMEXP, PERMTAB, PERMTABLOG) for ST models.

• Shales are considered in the calculations of rock heat conductivity, absolute permeability,
and rock enthalpy (keywords THCONR_SHL, PERMSHALE, ROCKCP_SHL) for ST
models.

• WAG hysteresis is supported (keywords HYS_MODEL 3PWAG, ALPHAKRG, ARE-

SOILKRG, SWT3) for GE models.

• Gravity drainage option is supported (option 1 of the keyword TRANSFER) for GE/IM
models.

• A 4-phase, 4-component extension of the black oil model is introduced for modeling
the miscible displacement of oil by the solvent (keywords MISCG, MISNCG, MINSS,
PVTS, OMEGASG, OMEGA_OST, SW_SORMT, INCOMP, SOLVENT) for IM mod-
els.

For models in MO format:

• Threshold pressure gradient on non-neighbor connections can now be specified (ONPD
option of the keyword NNC).

• A 4-phase, 4-component extension of the black oil model is introduced for modeling
the miscible displacement of oil by the solvent (keywords: SOLV (2nd parameter TL),
MFVS, MFVP, SPVT, FFVS, TODD, MROW, MCSW).

Special options:
• Well events in the SCHEDULE section can now be specified by means of Python scripts
(keyword APPLYSCRIPT).

• Automatic determination of azimuth angle for a fracture created via WFRACP when the
geomechanics feature (keyword GEOMECH) with FE option is added.

2.1. tNavigator kernel (Simulator) 20

 20.1

• Saturation function region can now be specified in the 7th parameter of COMPDATMD
keyword.

• Wet gas rate can now be specified in the 4th parameter of NETCOMPA keyword.

• The following scaling arrays are supported: SWUPC, SGUPC, ISWUPC, ISGUPC.

Data input-output:
• SUMMARY mnemonics:

– Graphs of information on separators and pressure gauges are added (WPRGGn).

– Graphs in the nodes of surface injection networks are added (GPRG, GPRW,
GPRBG, GPRBW, GWIRNB, GGIRNB).
– Bottomhole gas holdup ratio graph is added (WBGHR).
– Dynamic transmissibility coefficient graph is added (CTFRTMULT) if the ROCK-
TAB option is specified.

• RPTRST mnemonics:

– Rock compressibility is added (ROCKCOMP).

– Phase potentials are added (WATPOT, GASPOT, and OILPOT).
– Trapped gas saturation is added (SGTRAP).
– Transmissibility multipliers are added to the INIT file, provided that they were
changed using MULTFLT.

• Annual Summary Report:

– Annual Summary Report is now available in FIELD units.

– Annual Summary Report is now available for compositional and thermal models.

• Miscellaneous:

– The name of slave model may exceed 8 characters if LONGNAMES option is

used for Reservoir coupling models.

2.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator Graphical User Interface 19.4:

• The tNavigator main menu has been reorganized to group the related items together in
various modules.

• A compositional variant can now be created in PVT Designer based on the selected
model block in Simulator.

2.2. Graphical User Interface 21

 20.1

• The maximum stress vector can now be visualized by hovering a mouse pointer over a
block.

• Grid lines width can now be customized.

• Remote GUI now saves the history of started jobs.

2.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty

In Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 19.4:
• Optimization under uncertainty is supported. Each variant of forecast model is evaluated
automatically using several variants of historical variables.

• New optimization algorithm – Artificial Intelligence based on neural networks has been
added.

2.4. Geology Designer

In Geology Designer 19.4:

• Coordinate systems, units:

– The option to set different units for XY axis and Z axis is available (settings are
available in Units Manager).
– The option to specify custom coordinate systems in the proj4 format is added.

• Visualization:

– The option to visualize well attributes in 3D is available.

– The option to visualize point sets in 3D using the value of their attribute as Z-
coordinate is available.
– Point set attributes may now be displayed on crossplots.
– The option to set different units for XY axis and Z axis is available (settings are
available in Units Manager).
– The option to set horizontal and vertical scale in the Cross-sections tab is added.

• Seismic:

– Seismic horizons may now be visualized on 2D and their contour lines may be
displayed.
– The option to set a seismic reference datum for 2D or 3D seismic is implemented
(Seismic → Seismic Survey 3D → Set Seismic Reference Depth).
– The option to cut the seismic cube is added (Seismic → Seismic Survey 3D →
Cut Seismic Survey 3D).

2.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 22

 20.1

– Seismic data can be displayed as wiggles.

• Data Import/Export:

– Surfer 7 binary grid format is supported.

– Well data import: the option to set Magnetic Declination and the Convergence of
the Meridians during the well import using inclinometry is available.
– The option to export VPC, crossplots and histograms in table format is supported
(VPC, histograms or crossplots tab → Right panel button " Create button").

• Wells Table:

– The option to correct the altitude from the Wells Table is implemented.
– The option to manually add and delete duplicated markers and trajectory points (in
any location, and not only in the end).

• Work with wells:

– The option to add Well Patterns is implemented (2D → Right panel button
"Wells Placement Editor").
– The option to add Wells Filters using a Polygon is implemented (Polygons →
Create Well Filter by Polygons ).
– The option to create a Well Filter crossing faults is added (Polygons → Create
Wells Filter by Fault).
– The option to save angle values in the project during well import, if angles were
previously loaded (if not, they are computed as before). Input angles are lost when
the trajectory is modified.
– The option to display well attributes on the Well Section tab is added.

• Wells Attributes:

– The option to perform the stratification calculation using well logs is added (Wells
Attributes → Stratification calculation by Well Log (Wells Attribute)).
– The option to compute residuals at the points of intersection between horizons and
markers and to save these values (corresponding to the Z difference between the
markers and the horizon) is added (Wells Attributes → Calculate discrepancy
by horizon and marker or Calculate discrepancy by attribute and 2D-Map).
– The option to create well attributes by 2D Maps is added (Wells Attribute →
Create Well Attribute by 2D Maps).

• 2D Maps and Horizons:

– The option to correct horizons and 2D Maps using point sets is added (2D Maps
or horizons → Transformations → 2D-Map Adjustment to Pointset).

2.4. Geology Designer 23

 20.1

– The option to delete blank lines from 2D Maps and Horizons data is added (2D
Maps or Horizons → Delete Blank Lines of 2D-Map).
– The option to exclude blank nodes when the auto detection of the geometry is
performed is added. This way, blank nodes are not taken into account in the size
parameters.
– In the computation Local Map Update the input parameter has changed, it is now
possible to set a well attribute (2D Maps → Local Map Update).
– It is possible to create a horizon passing through a given point with a given azimuth
and direction (Horizons → Create → Create Horizon by Point, Azimuth and
Dip).
– The option of not clearing points set and their attributes in the universal 2D-
interpolation is added. This allows you to save discrepancies between several 2D
interpolations into one set of points for comparison. (2D Maps and Horizons →
Create → Universal Interpolation → Overwrite Pointset).

• Point Sets:

– It is possible to remove points inside or outside defined polygons (Horizons →

Transformations → Clear Point Set Near Faults).
– The option to create a point set using the well attributes is added, taking into
account the values of the attribute or its depth only (Horizons → Create →
Create Point Set by Well Attribute).

• Tables:

– The option to create a statistical table using a point set is added (Tables → Create
Table From Point Set).
– The option to create a table by markers is added (Tables → Create Table by
Markers).

• Polygons:

– The option of building buffer zones in horizontal plane around polygons has been
added (Polygons → Create → Offsets by Polygons).
– The option to edit polygons using a three-dimensional vector is added
(Polygons → Transformations → Transform Polygons → Translation Vec-
tor).

• Grids:

– The option of merging two grids has been added (Grids → Merge Grids).

• Properties:

2.4. Geology Designer 24

 20.1

– The option to specify a range as a 3D box for the source and destination grid when
copying the property is added (Properties → Auxiliary Calculations → Copy
Property).
– The option to calculate the distance from grid blocks to faults has been added
(Properties → Auxiliary Calculations → Distance).
– The option to calculate several properties simultaneously when resampling from
grid to grid is added (Grids → Create Grid → Create Coarse Grid or Create
Fine Grid).
– It is supported to use LGR in layer interpolation (Properties → Interpolation →
Multilayer Interpolation).
– The option of automatic normalization of trends in interpolation using trends is
added (Properties → Interpolation → Interpolation and Facies Modeling
(Zones, Regions)).
– Resampling calculation (Properties → Auxiliary Computations → Resam-
pling) is done on GPU, if tNavigator settings allow the usage of GPU.

• Workflow:

– The option to form a "for" loop and "if" conditional operator from the graphic
interface is added.

2.5. Model Designer

In Model Designer 19.4:

• Coordinate systems, units:

– The option to set different units for XY axis and Z axis is available (settings are
available in Units Manager).
– The option to specify custom coordinate systems in the proj4 format is added.

• Data import/export:

– VPC, crossplots, and histograms can now be exported in tabular form.

• Visualization:

– The option to visualize well attributes in 3D, using the value of the attribute as the
Z-coordinate is available.
– Statistics on several objects can be viewed simultaneously.
– The option to set horizontal and vertical scale in the Cross-sections tab is added.
– Crossplots and graphs of calculated parameters for individual blocks are added.
– 2D histogram for crossplot data is added.

2.5. Model Designer 25

 20.1

• Well rules:

– Reference depth can now be specified in the Reset Well Target rule.
– ARITHMETIC expressions can now be constructed in SCHEDULE (Wells
Data → Strategies → Add new rule → Rules at steps → Grid → Grid
Property Arithmetic).

• Wells table:

– The option to correct the altitude from the Wells Table is implemented.
– The option to add and remove duplicate markers and trajectory points (everywhere,
not just at the end).

• Working with wells:

– The option to add Well Patterns is implemented (2D → Right panel button
"Wells Placement Editor").
– The option to add Wells Filters using a Polygon is implemented (Polygons →
Create Well Filter by Polygons ).
– The option to create a Well Filter crossing faults is added (Polygons → Create
Wells Filter by Fault).
– The option to save angle values in the project during well import, if angles were
previously loaded (if not, they are computed as before). Input angles are lost when
the trajectory is modified.
– The option to display well attributes on the Well Section tab is added.

• Grids:

– The option of merging two grids has been added (Grids → Merge Grids).

• Grid properties:

– The option to specify a range as a 3D box for the source and destination grid when
copying the property is added (Properties → Auxiliary Calculations → Copy
Property).
– The option to calculate the distance from grid blocks to faults has been added
(Properties → Auxiliary Calculations → Distance).
– The option to calculate several properties simultaneously when resampling from
grid to grid is added (Grids → Create Grid → Create Coarse Grid or Create
Fine Grid).

• Objects editing:

2.5. Model Designer 26

 20.1

– Multiple editing for initial equilibrium tables is introduced (on Fluid Properties →
Initial → Equilibration data specification, the checked variants can be edited as
one common table).
– Numerical aquifers can now be specified (Geometry Objects → Aquifer Set-
tings → Calculations → Numerical Aquifer Settings).

• Workflows:

– The option to form a "for" loop and "if" conditional operator from the graphic
interface is added.
– The option to set variables for all geometric parameters of hydraulic fractures via
workflow is introduced (Calculations and Workflows → Fractures → Cre-
ate → Create Fracture Template).

• Integration with other modules:

– The project of Network Designer will be automatically created with a possibility of

its further modification in order to create and calculate the surface/subsurface in-
tegrated model when importing a dynamic model with injection network specified
with the keyword GNETINJE into the Model Designer.

2.6. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 19.4:

• PVT properties may now be imported from IM/ST/GE models.

• Correlation functions for the volume SHIFT factor are available.

• The functionality to check phase compressibility is available. PVT tables may be modi-
fied to correct the negative compressibility.

• MMP experiment is introduced for determination of the minimum miscibility pressure

of liquid and gas phases.

• Visualization of loaded parameters for every Sample data is now available.

• Creating a custom graph on Phase Envelope tab is available. Using this feature, two
phase diagrams for different compositions may be compared.

• New module integration features are added:

– Creation of a compositional variant in PVT Designer for any model block in Sim-
ulator.
– Creation of a compositional variant in PVT Designer for any surface network
object in Network Designer.

2.6. PVT Designer 27

 20.1

2.7. Network Designer

In Network Designer 19.4:

• Any object of surface network may be bypassed. New possible object status Bypass has
been added.

• The sequence of pipes connected with Joint may be merged in calculations (Settings →
Parameters →Properties → Merge Sequences of Pipes). Parameters of merged pipes
should be the same except Pipe Geometry.

• The option EOS Blend in Integrated Model is supported in MPI version.

• A compositional variant can be created in PVT Designer for any object of surface
network.

• The project of Network Designer will be automatically created with a possibility of

its further modification in order to create and calculate the surface/subsurface inte-
grated model when importing a dynamic model with injection network specified with
the keyword GNETINJE into the Model Designer.

• Graphs of components can be visualized.

2.8. VFP Designer

In VFP Designer 19.4:

• A tubing may be plugged (check Tubing → Table of Parameters → Bull Plug).

• The well construction may be visualized along its trajectory in 2D view (tab Well
Construction → button 2D view on the right panel).

• IPR curves may be visualized along with VFP curves (tab VFP).

2.9. Documentation, Localization

Translated to Spanish and Chinese languages:
• Batch Jobs User Guide (tNavBatchJobsUserGuide).

• Remote GUI User Guide (tNavRemoteGUIGuide).

• tNavigator Installation Guide (tNavInstallationGuide).

2.7. Network Designer 28

 20.1

New training tutorials are added for tNavigator 19.4:

• COMMON1.5 How to Work With Wells. In this tutorial we give an overview of the
tools for working with wells and well filters: import wells, visualization of wells in 2D
and 3D, cutting trajectories by depth, changing icons and trajectory colors for wells,
adding a simple well, copying an existing well’s trajectory, creating well filters.

• MD1.6. How To Edit Properties. In this tutorial we give an overview of creating/edit-

ing properties by using multipliers: Arithmetic Calculator, Block Calculator, Cylinder
Calculator, creating regions by brushing and making a new case with another defined
properties. Additional feature is described (Geology Designer license required): Inter-
polation of wells’ MULTX (Assign MULTX value to each well (any numbers 3, 5, 6,
...), interpolate to the whole grid and get smoothed MULTX property).

2.9. Documentation, Localization 29

 20.1

3. tNavigator 19.3
The key new features in tNavigator 19.3 are:

• In Simulator: Full GPU version is available for black oil models.

• In Geology Designer: New interpolation algorithms are available — TGS (Truncated

Gaussian Simulation) and Convergent.

• In Model Designer: DLS restriction may be taken into account in well trajectory speci-
fication.

• In PVT Designer: Li critical temperature coefficient may be set in compositional variants

to calculate critical point temperature.

• In AHM and Uncertainty module: several scenarios may be used to add variables to
the workflow in Model Designer. Variables the user can select are: RP parameters,
equilibration parameters, property multipliers by regions.

• In VFP Designer: New object is available – Pressure Gauge.

• In Network Designer: New object is available – Gas lift; gaslift network may be built.

3.1. tNavigator kernel (Simulator)

The tNavigator kernel 19.3 supports the following new functionality:
GPU calculations:
• Full GPU version is available for black oil models (some part of calculations may still
be run on CPU in case if the model contains many complex operations for wells).
Full GPU version may be switched on via the option GPU_MODE 4 of the keyword
TNAVCTRL.

• Models with BRINE, ASP, LOWSALT and hysteresis of relative permeabilities may be
calculated on GPU.

For models in E1 and E3 format:

• For isothermal compositional models the following options may be used simulta-
neously: LOWSALT+SURFACT and LOWSALT+SURFACTW (keywords HWSWL,
HWSWLPC, HWSWCR, HWSWU, HWSOWCR, HWSOGCR, HWKRW, HWKRWR,
HWKRO, HWKRORW, HWKRORG, HWPCW, LWSWL, LWSWLPC, LWSWCR,
LWSWU, LWSOWCR, LWSOGCR, LWKRW, LWKRWR, LWKRO, LWKRORW,
LWKRORG, LWPCW, LSLTWNUM).

• The trapped gas saturation may be used to modify the residual oil in the three-phase oil
RP model STONE 1 (parameter 4 of the keyword WAGHYSTR).

3. tNavigator 19.3 30
 20.1

• The option to set the multiplier for rock volumes calculations and change of logic in
the calculation of thermal conductivities is available for dual porosity models (keyword
ROCKFRAC).

• The option to calculate well potential rates ignoring any THP limits is available (param-
eter 40 of the keyword OPTIONS).

For models in E1 format:

• The polymer thermal degradation half life may be set as a function of temperature
(keyword PLYDHFLF).

• Network node name may be specified to set the node from which gas consumption is re-
moved or gas import is added for the group (parameter 4 of the keyword GCONSUMP).

For models in E3 format:

• Chemical reactions may be modeled in isothermal compositional models.

• Solid phase may be modeled in isothermal compositional models.

• The 4th option of the chemical reaction’s correction term may be used (2nd parameter
of the keyword EQLDREAC) (keywords EQLDREAC, EQLDTAB).

• The properties of water with dissolved CO2/H2S may be set as a function of salt in
isothermal compositional models (keyword SOLUBILS).

• The composition of injected oil may be set (keyword WINJOIL).

For models in IM, ST, GE formats:

• For models in IM, ST, GE formats the option OILWET is available to set oil as a wetting
phase and water as an intermediate wetting phase (keyword OILWET).

• For thermal models in ST multi-component water may be used.

• For models in ST format the shape factor K-HARMONIC may be used to calculate
matrix-fracture flows in dual porosity runs (keyword SHAPE).

• Manifold data may be set (keyword MANIFOLD).

Special options:
• In isothermal models the UVM (Unified Viscosity Model) may be used for polymers
(keywords PLYELVSC, PLYELVSV).

• In isothermal compositional models, the option to simulate the solution of an arbitrary

hydrocarbon component in water is available (keyword COMSOL).

3.1. tNavigator kernel (Simulator) 31

 20.1

• For thermal models the option of multi-component water model is available (keywords
KVCRWAT, WATVISCF, WATVINDX, STEVISCF, TREFW, CREFT1W, CREFT2W,
CREFPTW, TCRITW/TCRITWS, PCRITW/PCRITWS).
• The Barton-Bandis rock failure criterion is available (option BB of the keyword ROCK-
FAIL, keywords JRC, JCS).
• Different increments of size of the fracture stimulated zone NFZ may be set in dif-
ferent directions (in the keyword FRACTURE_TEMPLATE the following options
may be used STIMULATED_DELTA_UP, STIMULATED_DELTA_DOWN, STIMU-
LATED_DELTA_1, STIMULATED_DELTA_2).
• The logic of guide rates calculation for wells under group control may be switched:
based on potentials or based on the sum of completion connection factors (option
GRUPTARGPOT of the keyword TNAVCTRL).
• The group target logic calculation may be switched using different type of rate calcu-
lation: instantaneous well rate may be used or the average rate taking into account the
well efficiency factor (option GRUPTARGNET of the keyword TNAVCTRL).
• The option to manage all wells included into the selected node may be used: open, stop
or shut simultaneously (keyword NETNODE).
Data input-output:
• The option to save calculation results in OFM format is available. The option may be
requested as a keyword OFM, or in the simulator’s graphical interface (Reports → Save
graphs and properties binaries → Summary file) or from the Job queue (Settings →
New Job Options).
• The output option of RSM in the format convenient for import in EXCEL (keyword
EXCEL in the SUMMARY section).
• Formatted data may be read from grid files (parameter F in the keywords GDFILE,
VISGRID).
• The following SUMMARY mnemonics are supported:
– liquid flow rate in reservoir conditions – CVFR;
– well drawdown – WDRAW;
– miscibility factor for RP calculation – BFMISC;
– oil-gas surface tension – BSTEN.
• The following RPTRST mnemonics are supported:
– miscibility factor for the miscible displacement model – FMISC;
– total compressibility of fluid in the block – TOTCOMP.
• Fields TRANNNC and TRANGL are saved in .INIT file.

3.1. tNavigator kernel (Simulator) 32

 20.1

3.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator Graphical User Interface 19.3:

• The Dark Theme is available: visualization on a black background with white letters
(Main window → Toggle Dark / Light theme).

• Text library scripts may be loaded to the Graph Calculator (button Import Library
Scripts). Each script contains the detailed description and comments.

• Vectors for tracers, surfactants, alkalines and polymers may be used in Graph Calculator.

• The hydraulic fracture set via the keyword FRACTURE_TEMPLATE may be visualized
as a plane (check Fractures (via LGR) on the Settings panel).

3.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty

In Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 19.3:

• Specifying variables and algorithms:

– Real simulation case may be created from the variant built by Monte Carlo algo-
rithm for proxy model (Monte Carlo Results → Right click on the variant →
Create Real Variants from Selected Variants).

• Objective function:

– Historical points may be checked/unchecked in the table to be used or not used

in the objective function calculation (check Use near the point in the table on the
right).

• Workflow:

– Proxy models may be created using neural networks in the workflow

(Workflow → Proxy Models → Create Neural Proxy Model).

• Graph Calculator:

– New options are available that may speed up the loading of big AHM projects:
check boxes Automatically run script for new models (controls script recalcula-
tion upon addition of a new model) and Script defined for single model (sets the
scope of the script to be one model, rather than all models).
– Variables may be used in scripts (Variables tab in the Objects list).

• The following scenarios may be used to add variables to the workflow:

– RP variables creation (Fluid Properties → Relative permeability → button on

the right panel "Add variables to Workflow");

3.2. Graphical User Interface 33

 20.1

– Equilibrium variables creation (Fluid Properties → Initial → Equilibration

data specification → button on the right panel "Add variables to Workflow");
– Property multipliers by regions (Geometry objects → 3D → button on the right
panel "Multiply property by regions");
– Fault transmissibility multipliers (Geometry objects → 3D → button on the
right panel "Multiply Faults").

3.4. Geology Designer

In Geology Designer 19.3:

• Machine learning, artificial intelligence:

– The option to classify lithotypes along seismic horizon based on seismic volume
or seismic attributes is available (for data in depth or in time).

• Seismic:

– Seismic horizons may be visualized in 2D with contour lines.

• Import/Export:

– Wells attributes may be imported.

– Cross-sections may be imported as a set of X Y coordinates.
– Faulted horizons may be imported.
– Faults (sticks) may be imported in CHARISMA format.
– Well logs (in particular Checkshot) may be imported from arbitrary text table.
– The template may be assigned to the well log immediately in the import dialogue.
– The types of logs which have to be loaded can be selected in the import dialogue.
– Wells trajectories may be imported from one common table.
– All 2D-Maps may be exported simultaneously (2D-Maps → Export all 2D-Maps
to 2D-Map ASCII format).
– XY coordinates and scales MD and TVD may be exported for markers optionally
(Markers → Export → Text format → Advanced settings).

• Adding new wells and wells visualization:

– DLS restriction may be taken into account in well trajectory specification.

– A new well may be added quickly in the Wells Table (Wells Table → the button
Add Well on the right panel).
– Wells may be copied with the trajectory shift (Wells → Copy).

3.4. Geology Designer 34

 20.1

– Individual color of well trajectory may be set for each well in the Wells Table.
Then this color is used to display the well on 2D, 3D and Cross-Section tabs.
– Icons for wells may be selected on 2D view.
– Well Filters are redesigned. Well Filters are presented as a separate object in object
tree and may be used on different tabs(2D, 3D, Wells Table, etc.). Wells may be
added to the filter manually or via automatic operations (wells inside polygon, by
marker or attribute availability, wells, intersecting a horizon etc.). Child filters may
be created.
• Well data, attributes, logs:
– In the Wells Table the well log values may be cleared for a selected well or several
values of the selected log may be deleted.
– In the Calculator for Wells Attributes the result attribute may be tied to the speci-
fied depth.
– Regression equation may be selected using Cuddy et al. (1993) formula based on
well data (Well Logs → Water Saturation Regression).
• Markers:
– The option to calculate thickness by markers is available (Wells Attributes →
Thickness calculation by markers).
– Top and bottom markers of reservoir may be calculated (Markers → Build top
and bottom markers).
– Two options are available to display markers in 3D: point and 3D-disk.
• Well Section tab:
– A check box near the data (logs, markers, horizons) is available to hide temporary
their display on the Well Section. This option provides the possibility to save the
visualization setting for objects to be used again later.
– Dropdown menu with facies codes is available in the well log editing (button on
the right panel Edit Well Logs).
– Visualization settings of each log may be saved as default settings to be used later.
Each log can have its own default settings (right button click Settings, buttons Set
as Default and Restore as Default).
– 3D grid may be selected to be used in Add Grid Scale option and Draw Grid
option.
• Structural model:
– Faults may be created using faults from the structural model, faulted horizons may
be created using structural model horizons (Faults → Create faults by struc-
tural model; Faulted horizons → Create multivalued (faulted) horizons by
structural model).

3.4. Geology Designer 35

 20.1

– Fault lines may be used in horizons calculation in structural model.

• Point sets:

– Several points may be selected using lasso on 3D and 2D (button Edit Point Set).
Ctrl may be used to select several groups of points.
– A random point set may be created inside the boundary polygon (Point Sets →
Create Random Points Set).

• Faults:

– The intersection of faults may be calculated (Faults → Create Faults intersected

along sticks).
– Two faults may be merged in one (Faults → Create Fault by Faults Merging).
– Each fault may have its own color for visualization (the option is available on the
Settings panel for faults).

• Horizons and 2D-Maps:

– Convergent interpolation is available for 2D-Maps and Horizons (2D-Maps and

Horizons → Interpolation → Convergent).
– Dip angle and azimuth map may be calculated by horizon (2D-Maps → Dip angle
and azimuth map by horizon).
– Statistics for 2D-Maps and horizons is available (2D-Maps → Statistics by 2D-
Maps, Statistics by Horizons).
– 2D-Maps may be displayed in 3D.
– A new option is added to the calculation Thickness Map by Horizon: negative
values may be processed as Zero, Negative or No value (2D-Maps → Auxiliary
Calculations → Thickness Map by Horizons).
– Local 2D-Map update is available.

• BlockedWells:

– BlockedWells data may be presented in a table form (Tables → Create Blocked-

Wells Table).

• Grids:

– A new option is available to create grids by horizons: Bottom Layering Horizon

may be not equal to the Top Layering Horizon of previous zone (Grids → Create
grid → Create grid by horizons → set "Top Layering Horizon" and "Bottom
Layering Horizon").
– The minimum thickness of the block may be taken into account in grid building.

3.4. Geology Designer 36

 20.1

• Grid Properties:

– TGS (Truncated Gaussian Simulation) interpolation is available for discrete prop-

erties.
– Connected components may be calculated for given well intervals. This option
may be used to show the well connectivity taking into account the lithological
structure of the formation (Properties → Connected components → Connected
components → By BlockedWells).
– Two options may be used to calculate reservoir area and mean thickness: use
net volume or bulk volume (Properties → Calculate Volumetric Properties →
Table creation settings → Use net volume for area and thickness).

• Cross-Sections tab:

– Cross-Section may be created in 3D through any objects: point sets, faulted hori-
zons, horizons of structural model etc. (in Create Cross-Section window two op-
tions may be used: Use Grid and Use Any Objects, Use Any Points).
– Cross-Sections may be created via calculations: Create vertical cross-section,
Points selection etc.
– Objects of structural model may be visualized on the Cross-Section.

• Units:

– User units system may be created (Document → Units Settings).

– Conversion of units is available (Document → Units Settings).

• Integration with Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty module:

– Grid properties, horizons, 2D-Maps and tables created in model variants with dif-
ferent values of the variables are saved automatically (the new objects are available
in the corresponding folder in object tree).

• Other:

– The Dark Theme is available: visualization on a black background with white

letters (Main window → Settings → Toggle Dark / Light theme).
– Project autobackup is available (Document → Backup manager).
– Zip Archive with project may be saved (Document → Create Zip Archive with
Project).

3.4. Geology Designer 37

 20.1

3.5. Model Designer

In Model Designer 19.3:

• Tabs, general visualization parameters:

– The Dark Theme is available: visualization on a black background with white

letters (Main window → Settings → Toggle Dark / Light theme).

• Workflow:

– Workflows may be opened using button on the top panel.

– Well production and well structure tables may be modified (for example perfora-
tions may be added). Workflows → Utilities → Add custom code → Functions
in the groups "Well Production Table" and "Well Structure Table".

• Adding new wells and wells visualization:

– DLS restriction may be taken into account in well trajectory specification.

– A new well may be added quickly in the Wells Table (Wells Table → the button
Add Well on the right panel).
– Wells may be copied with the shift vector (Wells → Copy).
– Individual color of well trajectory may be set for each well in the Wells Table.
Then this color is used to display the well on 2D, 3D and Cross-Section tabs.
– Icons for wells may be selected on 2D view.
– Well Filters are redesigned. Well Filters are presented as a separate object in object
tree and may be used on different tabs(2D, 3D, Wells Table, etc.). Wells may be
added to the filter manually or via automatic operations (wells inside polygon, by
marker or attribute availability, wells, intersecting a horizon etc.). Child filters may
be created.

• Graphs:

– Text library scripts may be loaded to the Graph Calculator (button Import Library
Scripts). Each script contains the detailed description and comments.
– Vectors for tracers, surfactants, alkalines and polymers may be used in Graph
Calculator.

• Hydraulic fractures:

– Different increment size of Near-Fracture Zone may be used in different direc-

tions (Fracture template settings → Optional parameters → Increment size
of Near-Fracture Zone (Stimulated Delta 1/2/Up/Down)).

3.5. Model Designer 38

 20.1

– The table template may be specified for hydraulic fracture, defining the list of
columns to load; this selection may be used while importing the next table (button
on the right panel Export Template, Import Template).
– Fracture stage may be imported and may be used them to create LGR (calcula-
tions Fracture Stage → Import → Import Fracture Stage, Grids → LGR
operations → Create LGR by Fracture Stage).

• Units:

– User units system may be created (Document → Units Settings).

– Conversion of units is available (Document → Units Settings).

• Integration with Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty module:

– Grid properties, horizons, 2D-Maps and tables created in model variants with dif-
ferent values of the variables are saved automatically (the new objects are available
in the corresponding folder in object’s tree).
– The following scenarios may be used to add variables to the workflow:
∗ RP variables creation (Fluid Properties → Relative permeability → button
on the right panel "Add variables to Workflow");
∗ Equilibrium variables creation (Fluid Properties → Initial → Equilibra-
tion data specification → button on the right panel "Add variables to
Workflow");
∗ Property multipliers by regions (Geometry objects → 3D → button on the
right panel "Multiply property by regions");
∗ Fault transmissibility multipliers (Geometry objects → 3D → button on the
right panel "Multiply Faults").

• Other:

– Project autobackup is available (Document → Backup manager).

– Zip Archive with project may be saved (Document → Create Zip Archive with
Project).
– Production data from connections may be projected to the grid (DynamicModel →
BlockedWells → BlockedWells by connections). Created BlockedWells may be
visualized in 3D or on the Well Section to analyze well production profile.
– Nested LGRs may be created (Grids → LGR Operations → Create simple
LGR → Parent LGR name).

3.6. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 19.3:

3.6. PVT Designer 39

 20.1

• Li critical temperature coefficient may be set in compositional variants to calculate

critical point temperature.

• Oil compressibility may be calculated in CCE experiment.

• Compositional and thermal properties in standard conditions may be imported and ex-
ported.

• Folders for variants may be created.

• Units:

– User units system may be created (Settings → Units Manager).

– Conversion of units is available (Settings → Units Manager).

3.7. Network Designer

In Network Designer 19.3:

• New parameters are available for the object Constraints. New control types that may be
used: ORAT, GRAT, WRAT, molar rate. Minimum and maximum values of the control
may be set. Several Constraints objects may be connected to each other.

• Automatic Choke may be controlled by outlet pressure.

• Minimum and maximum values may be set for selected control of the Automatic Choke
(pressure).

• New object is available – Gas lift.

• Gaslift network may be used.

• Merging of several compositional variants (EOS blend) may be used in integrated model
surface-subsurface. In case if there are several EOS regions in the model, then the data
to merge is passed to the EOS blend function, the resulting fluid may be used in surface
network calculation.

• The project may be archieved.

• Templates for Python Objects may be created.

• Units:

– User units system may be created (Settings → Units Manager).

– Conversion of units is available (Settings → Units Manager).

3.7. Network Designer 40

 20.1

3.8. VFP Designer

In VFP Designer 19.3:
• Open hole modeling is available.

• New object is available – Pressure Gauge.

• Well construction may be copied from other VFP projects to the current project with an
appropriate scale.

• Parameters of Basic data (well type, preferred phase, etc.) and tables with Samples
may be edited simultaneously in several VFP projects (on the top panel Edit → Mul-
tiediting).

• Units:

– User units system may be created (Settings → Units Manager).

– Conversion of units is available (Settings → Units Manager).

3.9. Documentation, Localization

Localization (Spanish language):
• Graphical interface of the following modules has been translated: PVT Designer, AHM
and Uncertainty module.

• The following documents have been translated: tNavLicenseServerAdministrationGuide,

tNavDispatcherAdministrationGuide.

Localization (Chinese language):

• Graphical interface of the following modules has been translated: Geology Designer,
Network Designer, VFP Designer.

• The following documents have been translated: tNavLicenseServerAdministrationGuide,

tNavDispatcherAdministrationGuide.

tNavigator embedded help:

• Embedded help has been added to simulator’s graphical interface.

New training tutorials are added for tNavigator 19.3:

• New tutorials for module Geology Designer:

• GD7.1. How To Use Python Scripts For Static Modeling)

In this tutorial we give an example of Python scripts in Geology Designer. The
tutorial uses the Teapot dome field (open source data set – 1315 wells). Objective
of the tutorial:

3.8. VFP Designer 41

 20.1

– Build a Python script for horizon creation;

– Understand the use of For loops for automation purposes;
– Understand the use of predefined Geology Designer Python functions;
– Be able to understand a Python script and build a new one.
Tutorial steps: Load the data (using an existing workflow), write a custom code
(Python script), in order to:
– Compute 8 horizons by well markers;
– Compute the residuals between the created horizon and the markers;
– Map those residuals.

• New tutorials for module Simulator:

• SIM0.3 EOR Tools In Simulator

This tutorial gives the general overview of EOR options: Alkaline, Surfactant,
Polymer (ASP), BrightWater nanopolymer technology, Foam; Salinity (dissolution
of rock salt in formation, low salinity combined with ASP); CO2 injection, WAG,
alternating water-gas injection, mixed injection; Thermal methods (steam-assisted
gravity drainage (SAGD), combustion in situ).

• New tutorials for module AHM and Uncertainty:

• AHM1.12 How To Do Economic Optimization

This tutorial shows an example of Field Development Planning optimization cou-
pled with Economic Modeling performed in third party software (MS Excel). In-
tegration between tNavigator and MS Excel is done via custom Python script.
All economic parameters (Cash Flow, OPEX, CAPEX, Taxes etc.) and various
profitability indexes (NPV, DPI BCR) are calculated via user-defined algorithms
in MS Excel. tNavigator optimization tools are used to find the most efficient
waterfloding strategy in terms of financial outcome.

• New tutorials for modules Model Designer, AHM and Uncertainty:

• MDAHM1.3 How To Find The Best Well Trajectory

In this training tutorial we optimize the trajectory of horizontal well. The model
in standard format E1 is loaded to Model Designer. Available workflow (Python
script) creates a top and bottom horizons from grid and adds a well keeping the
trajectory within the reservoir. The following variables are used: X, Y coordinates
of T1 points and angles. Z coordinates of points T1, T2, T3 are calculated au-
tomatically taking top and bottom horizons into account. Optimization algorithm
uses the following objective function - maximize oil production and minimize wa-
ter production. The final trajectory may be exported from Model Designer in the
format X Y Z MD.

3.9. Documentation, Localization 42

 20.1

4. tNavigator 19.2
The key new features in tNavigator 19.2 are:
• In Simulator: Multiple GPUs may be used for isothermal compositional models for
vapor-liquid equilibrium, phase properties and their derivatives calculations.
• In Geology Designer:
– Interpolation algorithms (Kriging, SGS, SIS) may be run on GPU (GPU is used in
3D grid properties calculation Interpolation (Zones, Regions) and Facies Mod-
elling (Zones, Regions)).
– The lithotypes prediction along wellbores using machine learning algorithms is
available.
– The option to classify lithotypes along seismic horizon based on seismic volume
or seismic attributes is available.
• In Model Designer: The new option is available for hydraulic fractures to switch be-
tween LGR approximation and virtual connection approximation.
• In PVT Designer black-oil delumping options have been implemented to provide con-
version of black oil models to compositional models.
• In AHM and Uncertainty module new algorithms have been implemented: Ensemble
and Box-Behnken.
• In VFP Designer new object is available – Electric Submersible Pump (ESP).
• In Network Designer new object is available – Python Object. The functions of this
object may be set via Python code via application programming interface API.

4.1. tNavigator kernel

The tNavigator kernel 19.2 supports the following new functionality:
GPU calculations:
• Multiple GPUs may be used for isothermal compositional models for vapor-liquid equi-
librium, phase properties and their derivatives calculations.
For models in E1 and E3 format:
• The multiplying factor for a control or limit value of a group may be used (keyword
GTMULT).
• The option to define different settings of well block pressure averaging separately for
each well is available (keyword WWPAVE).
• Different options may be used in coal bed methane model calculation (parameters 1, 5-9
of the keyword CBMOPTS).

4. tNavigator 19.2 43
 20.1

For models in E1 format:

• An analytical model of foam effect on gas mobility was implemented (option FUNC of
the keyword FOAMOPTS).

• The maximum surface gas concentration that will be used for Langmuir Isotherm scaling
was implemented for coal bed methane models (keyword MLANG).

For models in E3 format:

• Transport coefficients may be used in isothermal compositional models (keywords AL-
PHA, TRCOEF, ALPHANUM).

• For isothermal compositional models a fully implicit scheme for polymer, surfactant
and foam injection based on the use of multicomponent water has been implemented
(keywords CWTYPE, FOAMFRM, FOAMFSC, FOAMFSW, FOAMFSO, FOAMFST,
FOAMFCN).

For models in IM, ST, GE format:

• The range for permeability interpolation may be set in fracture zone (option
FRAC_CON of the keyword PLNRFRAC_TEMPLATE).

• The option to disable or enable group cycling control has been implemented (keyword
GCONCYCLE).

• For models in GE format the recycling (reinjection) control parameters may be set
(options RECYCLE, RECFRC of the keyword GCONI).

• The multiplying factor for a group injection rate may be used (the keyword GCONI-
MULT).

For models in MO format:

• The option to turn on/off pinchouts is available (keyword PNSW).

Special options:
• The new option is available for hydraulic fractures (FRACTURE_TEMPLATE
etc.) to switch between LGR approximation and virtual connection approx-
imation (keyword TNAVCTRL, option FRACTURE_BUILD_LOGIC parameter
USE_VIRTUAL_CONNECTIONS).

• For models in E1 and E3 format the fault may be set in local grid (LGR) (keyword
FAULTSL).

• For compositional models in E3 format water saturation may be modified in SCHED-

ULE section (keyword SWAT).

4.1. tNavigator kernel 44

 20.1

• The new option THRESHOLD of the keyword TNAVCTRL may be used to limit the
number of virtual perforations created for hydraulic fractures via the keywords WFRA,
WFRAC, WFRACP, WFRACPL.

• For compositional models in E3 format the gas source that will determine a gas compo-
sition for artificial gas lifting may be used (keyword WGASLIFT).

Data input-output:
• At the end of the log-file the statistics table has been added (number of iterations, restart,
size of results etc.).

• The format of Annual Summary Report allows to open it via open-source software like
Libre Office.

• Annual Summary Report may be opened directly from tNavigator interface with pre-
defined software.

• The new keyword PERFORMA is available to set simultaneously several parameters

like CPU time (TCPU), total elapsed (ELAPSED) etc.

• The following SUMMARY mnemonics are supported:

– Rates below and above contacts: FOPRA, FOPRB, FOPTA, FOPTB, FGPRA,
FGPRB, FGPTA, FGPTB.
– Parameters of numerical aquifers: ANQR, ANQT, ANQP, FNQT, FNQR.
– Grid blocks parameters: BPRES (BPR), BOSAT (BSOIL), BWSAT (BSWAT).
– Mass rates for connections: CWMR, CWMT, COMR, COMT, CGMR, CGMT.
– Group control for production group: GMCTP.

4.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator Graphical User Interface 19.2:

• The calculation and visualization of tracer parameters for fluid-in-place regions is avail-
able.

• Directional relative permeabilities may be visualized as 3D grid properties and as cor-

responding graphs for grid blocks.

• The option to extend start/end of the Multi Well Fence has been implemented (Create
Cross-Section → Multi Well Fence → Extend start/end of Cross-Section).

• While the model is loaded previously calculated grid properties (in binary E1 format)
may be loaded as well. Loaded grid properties are visualized in the tree Grid Properties
as Results(model_name).

4.2. Graphical User Interface 45

 20.1

• Loaded grid properties (in E1 binary format) may be visualized as graphs on the tabs
Graphs → Block Info and Profile Info.
• In Export all graphs dialog the option to save and use the selected parameters is avail-
able (Button Export all on the right Graphs panel, options Load Selection, Save Se-
lection).
• Previously created graphs may be used in Graph Calculator. If the graph was cre-
ated in scripts via export() function it may be used later in other scripts via function
get_global_graph (name).
• In arithmetic operations (ARITHMETIC) the address to fracture zone/near fracture zone
(FZ/NFZ) can be made via functions BGFZ_<STAGE>, BGNFZ_<STAGE>. This func-
tion should be used in User Maps in graphical interface to build this regions property.

4.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty

In Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 19.2:
• Specifying variables and algorithms:
– New optimization algorithm is available – Ensemble method.
– New experimental design algorithm is available – Box-Behnken.
– Multi-objective Differential Evolution algorithm has been implemented.
– Fast start of Sensitivity Analysis or history matching optimization is available from
Model Designer and Geology Designer (extended dialogue to create AHM project
from the Workflow).
• Objective function:
– Well filter may be loaded from file and applied in objective function creation.
– The option to hide cases outside objective function deviation range is available
(button Hide unmatched models).
– Visualization of objective function graph has been implemented (Graphs → ob-
ject Mismatches).
• Other:
– PCA (Principal component analysis) algorithm is available to visualize results on
2D view (tab 2D → PCA).
– Visualization of quantiles graphs has been implemented (button Show Quantile
Graphs).
– Matching for 2D-Map parameters is available in Geology Designer (in matching
process table may be used that is created via calculation Tables → Create Table
from Map).

4.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 46

 20.1

– Create NPV Script option is available to calculate NPV in Graph Calculator and
use it in objective function for optimization.

4.4. Geology Designer

GPU Calculations:
• Interpolation algorithms (Kriging, SGS, SIS) may be run on GPU (GPU is used in
3D grid properties calculation Interpolation (Zones, Regions) and Facies Modelling
(Zones, Regions)).

In Geology Designer 19.2:

• Machine learning, artificial intelligence:

– The lithotypes prediction along wellbores using machine learning algorithms is

available.
– The option to classify lithotypes along seismic horizon based on seismic volume
or seismic attributes is available.

• Seismic:

– 3D seismic data may be visualized in depth in Cross-Section tab (for example, it

can be used to create geological bodies).
– Spectral decomposition calculation is available (Seismic → Seismic Surveys 3D
→ Calculate Attributes → Spectral Decomposition).

• Import/Export:

– Log data may be exported in the table text format (Logs → Export → Table
Format).
– Several logs may be exported to one file in the LAS format.
– Several wells tables may be imported from one file (Wells → Import → Multiple
Well Tables from Text File).
– All data may be loaded from RESCUE file through workflow (check boxes Load
all properties, all wells, all faults, all horizons.

• Well data, logs:

– The option to create Discrete Log Statistics Table is available (Tables → Create
Discrete Log Statistics Table).
– Well Filter may be used in Well Log Calculator.
– The following types of Log visualization may be used in 3D view: Cylinders,
Lines, Curves, Solid Rectangles.

4.4. Geology Designer 47

 20.1

– Tracks may be hidden for well logs display on 2D (Log signatures) to show only
curves.

• Well Section tab:

– Functionality to control the track of new log is available: add it to the first track
or to a separate track (right click to enable the settings Add logs to First track).
– The visualization settings of several markers may be changed simultaneously –
select all markers and set the settings you need.
– The Ghost Curve may be scaled vertically and horizontally, its vertical bounds may
be modified. The corresponding hot keys are: Ctrl+mouse wheel and Alt+mouse
wheel.
– Button Check All is available to select all wells.
– The synchronization is available for logs palette is available for Well Section and
3D view if palette bounds are set manually.
– Markers position may be changed in the settings list.
– Quick access to track settings, marker, log settings is available via mouse right
click.
– Show Statistics option is available on the right panel.

• Structural model:

– Y/Lambda faults (truncated faults) may be used in structural model.

• Horizons and 2D-Maps:

– Logical operations are available.

– Interpolation mode type may be set via right click for 2D-Map visualization: Linear
or Discrete.
– Azimuth maps may be used in Kriging and SGS interpolation.
– New algorithm is available for 2D-Maps Universal Interpolation – Amazonas.

• Grid:

– The dip angle may be set in simple grid creation (3D-Grids → Create Grid →
Create Simple Grid → Dip angle → Azimuth, Dip).

• Point Sets:

– Point set may be created from fault’s surface.

– Points sets filters have been implemented (in Settings for Point Sets polygon may
be selected as s filter for points visualization).

• Polygons:

4.4. Geology Designer 48

 20.1

– Polygon may be created by horizon and faults intersection.

– The components of polygons may be saved as separate polygons (Polygons →
Polygons to Components).
– Polygon’s center may be autodetected to perform the polygon Scale operation to
change its scale relative to the center.

• Faults:

– The surface of fault may be extended to the specified depth, horizon or at length
(Faults → Extend Fault Surface).

• Grid Properties:

– A discrete property may be filtered according to the neighboring blocks values, the
most common value of neighboring blocks is assigner to the block (Properties →
Auxiliary Calculations → Discrete Property Filtering).
– Standard statistics are available for connected components (count, sum, minimum,
maximum, average) (Properties → Connected Components → Calculate Over
Components).
– The possibility to edit parameters simultaneously for multiple zones, regions (fa-
cies) is available in dialogues Facies Modelling (Zones, Regions), Property Interpo-
lation (Zones, Regions) (check box Apply changes to all zones/regions (facies)).
– Property Interpolation by Property may be used to fill missing data in geobodies
construction process.
– Grid quality checks have been implemented (Grid Properties → Grid Quality
→ Cell Deviation Angle, Cell Concavity Level).

• Cross-Sections tab:

– Contacts visualization is available.

– Faulted horizons visualization is available.
– Blocked Wells visualization is available.

• Tabs, general visualization parameters:

– The position of camera may be saved and loaded in 3D view (button in the right
panel Views and Presentation params choose Save User View and Load User
View).
– Grid layers filter is available to show selected range of layers for I, J, K, and also
automatic scrolling mode, shifting the indexes by one for the sequential display of
groups of layers (Grid Settings → Filter → Layers Filter).

4.4. Geology Designer 49

 20.1

– The display of points on the Crossplot in ranked form is available. Instead of points
array XiYi we display the points array XkYk, where k - the rank of correspond-
ing values (relation type – direct or inverse). The array of points is temporarily
reordered so that a smaller value of X corresponds to a smaller value of Y, and so
on. Or for the case of inverse relation – the largest X corresponds to the smallest
Y.
– Well, markers and attributes caption fonts may be modified.
– The option to extend start/end of the Multi Well Fence has been implemented
(Create Cross-Section → Multi Well Fence → Extend start/end of Cross-
Section).
– Markers on 2D may be visualized in the following modes: circle, outlined circle,
ring.
– Several VPCs may be visualized simultaneously at one tab.

• Other:

– New object is available – Borehole Image. It may be loaded from LAS files and
visualized on the Well Section.
– New objects are available – Zone table and well log Zone Log, that may be
calculated via zones table (Logs → Logs Calculation → Create Zone Log).
– Data declusterization is available for histograms calculation and performing
stochastic modeling algorithms. Declustering Weights are created from point sets
numerical attributes and Blocked Wells (calculation Declustering Weights). The
resulting weight may be used in histograms, VPC, interpolation.
– Volume weighting is available for histograms.

4.5. Model Designer

In Model Designer 19.2:

• Import/Export:

– In Import Data from Existing Model process the previously calculated grid
properties may be loaded as well (properties in E1 binary format). Loaded grid
and properties are visualized in the object tree below the main_grid as a separate
object Results(main_grid).
– Grid with LGR (format EGRID) and corresponding grid properties (format
UNRST) may be loaded to the project.

• Grids:

4.5. Model Designer 50

 20.1

– The option of automatic detection of the box boundaries (Lower/Upper I, J, K

indexes) from the selected grid property filter is available to create logarithmic
LGR (3D-Grids → LGR Operations → Create Simple LGR → Autodetect
parameters by filter property).
• Tabs, general visualization parameters:
– The position of camera may be saved and loaded in 3D view (button in the right
panel Views and Presentation params choose Save User View and Load User
View).
– Grid layers filter is available to show selected range of layers for I, J, K, and also
automatic scrolling mode, shifting the indexes by one for the sequential display of
groups of layers (Grid Settings → Filter → Layers Filter).
– The display of points on the Crossplot in ranked form is available. Instead of points
array XiYi we display the points array XkYk, where k - the rank of correspond-
ing values (relation type – direct or inverse). The array of points is temporarily
reordered so that a smaller value of X corresponds to a smaller value of Y, and so
on. Or for the case of inverse relation – the largest X corresponds to the smallest
Y.
– The option to extend start/end of the Multi Well Fence has been implemented
(Create Cross-Section → Multi Well Fence → Extend start/end of Cross-
Section).
• Workflow:
– Fracture table may be edited in the workflow (Workflow → Fractures → Adjust
Fracture table).
– New functions for object visualization control is available: Palette (Show/Hide),
Select Graph Model, Select Graph Object, Select Graph Template, Select Crossplot
Axis, Create Screenshots Pack for selected range of time steps.
• Model Cases:
– The state of each model case and its results is saved. In the Cases tree each variant
can have different calculation results related to it (depending on included grid
properties, RP, PVT, etc.). When you switch to each set of results, the state of the
model (a set of files and settings) that was used in this calculation is displayed.
When you switch to the case itself, it’s current state is displayed (a set of files and
settings).
– Mnemonics of grid properties and graphs may be used to set the data output in the
binary format E1: Cases → Selective Writing of Results → Additional Data.
The new rule for time steps is available Wells Data → Strategies → Add new
rule → Results file control.
• Graphs:

4.5. Model Designer 51

 20.1

– Previously created graphs may be used in Graph Calculator. If the graph was
created in scripts via export() function it may be used later in other scripts via
function get_global_graph (name).
– Visualization of graphs for tracers is available.
– Calculation results are grouped for cases on the Graphs tab.

• Other:

– The new option is available for hydraulic fractures to switch between LGR ap-
proximation and virtual connection approximation: Cases → Runspec → Tun-
ing → Settings of model reading and calculation → Show table → Frac-
ture_Build_Logic.

4.6. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 19.2:

• Black-oil delumping options have been implemented to provide conversion of black oil
models to compositional models.

• A three-phase (vapor-liquid-solid phase) algorithm has been implemented for phase

equilibrium calculation to model the precipitation of a solid phase (asphaltenes, paraf-
fins).

• Split tables may be used for separator stages.

• Visualization of Hoffman Plot is available.

• New non-equilibrium flash models have been implemented, taking into account the
three-phase nature of non-equilibrium phase transitions.

4.7. Network Designer

In Network Designer 19.2:

• New network object is available – Python Object. The functions of this object may be
set via Python code via application programming interface API.

• Injection network may be constructed and calculated.

• IPR tables may be used to control the well via autochoke in the integrated model.

• The inflow model of the perforation interval of the well has been supported for the
integrated surface-subsurface model (Settings → Properties → Use Connections in
Integration Wells).

• The possibility to compare results of several cases is available.

4.6. PVT Designer 52

 20.1

• User actions may be set and started at the end of each calculation step. User may use all
input parameters of all objects (pipe thickness, chokes etc.), all calculated parameters of
all object’s links (rates, pressure, velocity, etc.), lists of objects, steps, links, and also all
input parameters of all objects may be modified (button Open Python Actions Editor
on the top panel).

• The calculation of integrated model surface-subsurface (built in Network Designer) is

available for Reservoir Coupling models.

• In Events Editor: parameters may be edited in the table form for time steps, object
filters may be used.

• Advanced Mode is available to set pipe geometry in the table form.

4.8. VFP Designer

In VFP Designer 19.2:

• Well construction may be edited simultaneously in different projects.

• Sample data table may be set for several projects.

• New object is available – Electric Submersible Pump (ESP).

• Pressure loss from the top perforation to the tubing entrance is taken into account.

• Several VFP projects may be deleted simultaneously from Project Tree.

4.9. Documentation, Localization

Localization:
• Translated into Spanish: graphical interface of the Simulator and Model Designer.

• Translated into Chinese: graphical interface of Model Designer, PVT Designer, AHM
and Uncertainty.

tNavigator embedded help:

• Embedded help has been added to PVT Designer, VFP Designer, Network Designer and
AHM and Uncertainty module.

New training tutorials are added for tNavigator 19.2:

• New tutorials for module Geology Designer:

4.8. VFP Designer 53

 20.1

• GD3.5 How To Use MPS for Lithology Modeling

In this tutorial we give an overview of the Multi-point facies simulation (MPS).
This is a pixel-based algorithm which can be used to simulate object-like facies
models. The supported property distributions for this method can be more com-
plicated than the ones used for the Sequential Indicator Simulation (SIS). The
principle is based on the definition of a training image which corresponds to the
typical structures that can be found in the model. In this tutorial we perform the
following steps: create a training image, perform a discrete property realization
using the MPS algorithm, remove the noise using a filter, QC the filtering.

• New tutorials for modules VFP Designer, Simulator:

• SIMVFP1.1 How To Use Multisegment Wells

In this tutorial first we create a multilateral well in VFP Designer and import the
created VFP project to the dynamic model using the keyword IMPORT_PROJECT.
Second we create a multilateral multisegmented well using the VFP Designer and
import this project to the dynamic model. Then we estimate the effect of multiseg-
ment well model by comparison with well model without segments in Simulator’s
graphical interface.

4.9. Documentation, Localization 54

 20.1

5. tNavigator 19.1
The key new features in tNavigator 19.1 are:

• In simulation kernel: The support of NVLink bus between GPU in multiple GPU runs
is available. This provides the speed-up in data exchange between GPU and doesn’t
require PCI-E bus participation in this exchange.

• In Geology Designer:

– 3D velocity model calculation is available. Conversions from time to depth and

depth to time. Transfer of seismic horizons and faults from time to depth using
velocity model.
– Embedded help has been added to calculations of Geology Designer.

• In Model Designer: The possibility to customize page settings to print and create screen-
shots in workflow is available.

• In PVT Designer: A procedure of EOS blend is implemented. It creates a common

compositional model for multiple different variants using the adaptive splitting of the
original components into standard ones.

• In VFP Designer: New elements for well construction: a pull (keyword WSEGPULL)
and a down-hole separator (keyword WSEGSEP) have been added.

• In AHM and Uncertainty: The possibility to create a Proxy model using a neural network
is available.

• In Network Designer: New object – Autochoke has been added. It provides the pressure
drop required for convergence of system of integrated equations.

• In license server: Cryptographic protection is supported for the license server access
(HTTPS protocol).

5.1. tNavigator kernel

The tNavigator kernel 19.1 supports new functionality for the models in E1, E3, IM, ST, and
GE format:
GPU Calculations:
• In simulation kernel: The support of NVLink bus between GPU in multiple GPU runs
is available. This provides the speed-up in data exchange between GPU and doesn’t
require PCI-E bus participation in this exchange.

5. tNavigator 19.1 55
 20.1

For models in E1 and E3 formats:

• For thermal models in E3 format the possibility to specify the position and parameters of
heater connections in a local grid refinement (LGR) is available (keyword HEATERL).

• Tracer diffusion is available for black oil models in E1, E3 formats and isothermal com-
positional models in E3 format if tracer is connected to one-component water (keyword
TRDIF).

• For compositional models in E3 format the possibility to specify the upper threshold of
transmissibility between two cells in Z direction is available (keyword MAXTRANZ).

• The possibility to replace non-neighbor connections generated by faults in the grid is

available (keyword EDITNNCR).

• The possibility to specify the target or limit value for wells using UDQ in the keyword
WELTARG is available.

• The possibility to specify a well connection transmissibility factor (WPIMULT), a pro-

ductivity (injectivity) index (PI) for wells (WELPI), well connection transmissibility
factors in local grids (WPIMULTL) using UDQ is available.

• The possibility to specify recovery plant tables (keyword RECOVERY) in the SCHED-
ULE section is available.

For models in IM, ST, GE formats:

• For models in GE format gas diffusion between matrix and fracture (keyword DIFFU-
SION) can be included into molecular flux.

• The possibility to change a logic of action of consecutive transmissibility multipliers

specified by keywords TRANSI/J/K, TRANLI/J/K (keyword TRANSMULT) is avail-
able.

• The possibility to specify well cutback limits for producers and injectors (keyword
OPERATE WCUTBACK) is available.

• The possibility to specify the autodrilling sequence for wells (keyword DRILLQ ) is
available.

For models in MO format:

• The possibility to specify the table of multipliers for permeability-related parameters as
a function of the tracer concentration (keyword TFUN) is available.

• The limit type SHUT (all wells in the group will be shut when limit violation occurs)
has been added to the keyword GLIM.

• The possibility to specify economic limits for wells and actions to wells when limit will
be violated (keyword PLIM).

5.1. tNavigator kernel 56

 20.1

Special options:
• The possibility to specify the scaling of end points depending on the concentration of
tracers has been added (keywords NPKTRC, ENPCTRC, ENPTRCM, ENPKTRCM,
ENPCTRCM).
• The possibility to flexibly specify well cutback limits for producers and injectors is
available (keyword WCUTBACX).
• Reinjection or voidage replacement control has been added to the keyword WWAG.
• Workover operations for well have been added (keyword WECONX): CON_BOTTOM –
close the bottom connection, CON_TOP – close the top connection, CON_WORST –
close the worst connection.
• The possibility to normalize calculated VFP tables using the option VFP_CURVES_NORMALIZE
of keyword TNAVCTRL is available.
• The option WELLEQUATIONS of keyword RUNCTRL is automatically turned on to
accelerate calculation of models with very long wells or/and large number of fractures.
• Different arithmetic operators (”+ =”, ”− =”, ”∗ =”, ”/ =”) have been added for
editing grid properties in fracture zone and fracture stimulated zone (keyword FRAC-
TURE_ARITHMETIC).
• The possibility to model the intersection of fractures.
• Default parameters of LGR construction for hydraulic fractures is changed. Unstruc-
tured grid with nested LGRs is created (In tNavigator 18.4 logarithmic refinement
was constructed without nested LGRs). Settings can be changed via parameter FRAC-
TURE_BUILD_LOGIC of the keyword TNAVCTRL.
Data input-output:
• Storage of calculation results is optimized in order to decrease the amount of occupied
hard disk space. Additional keywords RPTRSTD, RPTRSTL, RPTRSTT for specifying
restart steps have been added. For these steps all properties and graphs are saved, there-
fore a model can restart from them. For other steps calculation results will be recorded
if keywords RPTMAP(D,L,T), RPTGRAPH(D,L,T) are specified.
• Option of calculation results thinning has been added. The possibility to specify time
steps at which calculation results (graphs, properties) should be recorded or deleted is
available in graphical interface. The recorded results are enough to view a model in Re-
sults visualization regime. Main window of tNavigator → Modeling → Simulation
Results → Thinning Results.
• Mnemonics ICONN, SCONN, XCONN, IWELL, SWELL, XWELL, ZWELL for export
to .UNRST file.
• The possibility to open a restart model using Simulation Results without base model.

5.1. tNavigator kernel 57

 20.1

5.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator Graphical User Interface 19.1:
• In dual porosity models for single porosity area (DPNUM=0) visualization is added on
the Matrix tab (visualization is not provided on the Fracture tab).

• The possibility to view results of integrated network model is available (A Network

Designer license is needed for calculations, but the results can be viewed using the
license of the Graphical User Interface only).

• Include files are grouped for sections in the Files menu (RUNSPEC, GRID etc).

• The possibility to scroll layers on the filter in 3D view is available (This filter is below
3D visualization panel).

5.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty

In Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 19.1:
• Specifying variables and algorithms:

– The possibility to create a Proxy model using a neural network is available.

– The estimation of Proxy model quality based on R2 coefficient has been added.
– The possibility to use string variables for optimization algorithms (Differential
evolution and Particle Swarm Optimization algorithm) is available.

• Objective function:

– The possibility to transfer an objective function between projects is available.

– The possibility to change absolute and relative deviations from historical values
for each point of objective function (length of "segment") in a table is available.

• Workflow:

– The possibility to run the workflow from the module interface is available. Creation
of simple objective function, launch of Latin Hypercube and Optimization are
available.

• Other options:

– The possibility to edit groups of variants (add variants to groups, specify a group
color for visualization) is available.
– The possibility to specify weights of variables for MDS and clusterization is avail-
able (a weight of each variable is used in calculation of distance between pair of
points; i.e. variables with lowest weights weakly affect the distance between pair
of points and, hence, MDS plot).

5.2. Graphical User Interface 58

 20.1

– The possibility to color the selected variants according to user defined gradient
(Add Variants to Group → Call Groupset Manager → Add gradient).
– A filter for model variables has been added.

5.4. Geology Designer

In Geology Designer 19.1:

• Seismic:

– 3D velocity model calculation is available. Conversions from time to depth and

depth to time. Transfer of seismic horizons and faults from time to depth using
velocity model.
– Seismic tab is synchronized with 2D and 3D tabs. Object and area selected in
Seismic tab is visualized on 2D and 3D tab.
– Visualization of seismic objects on 2D view: seismic data is visualized with cap-
tions and the possibility to customize visualization options.
– Statistics for seismic is available. Right click on the seismic survey to see Object
Statistics: samples informations, CMP, file information etc.

• Import/Export:

– The possibility to import point sets with attributes in the format ASCII internal
points is available. Point Sets → Import With Attributes → Header format
ASCII internal points.
– The possibility to export horizons and 2D-Maps in surfer .grd format.
– The possibility to export polygons in surfer .bln format.

• Well data, logs:

– Linear Regression calculation is available for Logs.

– The possibility to create Log statistics table for each specific interval is available.
Tables → Create Log Statistics Table.
– The possibility to create Log by Blocked Wells is available. Logs → Logs Cal-
culation → Create Log by Blocked Wells.
– The following new options are available (Logs → Logs Calculation):
∗ Spline interpolation using user-defined points;
∗ Rescaling (min-max normalization);
∗ Mute (with three sigmas correction).
– The possibility to do log normalization by well is available. (Logs → Logs Cal-
culation → Log normalization).

5.4. Geology Designer 59

 20.1

– The possibility to filter logs by top and bottom marker (or depth) is available for
Histogram and Crossplot to analyze data in the specific depth range.

• Well Section tab:

– The possibility to edit new log interactively is available. Well Section → Button
"Edit Well Logs" → Add Log Points.
– The possibility to align logs is available (depth alignment). Well Section → But-
ton "Edit Well Logs" → Shift Log Vertically.

• Structural modeling:

– The possibility to create horizon from faulted horizon is available. Horizons →

Auxiliary Calculations → Create Horizon by Faulted (Multivalued) Horizon.
– The possibility to create point set from faulted horizon is available. Point sets→
Create Point Set by Faulted (Multivalued) Horizon.
– The possibility to update horizon locally is available.
– The possibility to create multivalued (faulted) horizon by grid layer is available.
– The possibility to create multivalued (faulted) horizon by grid filter is available
(filter is specified via filter property).
– The possibility to create bottom/roof horizon by grid is available.

• Structural model:

– New options for taking into account isochores and proportional partitioning are
available.
– The possibility to create structural model with faults is available.

• Interpolation:

– Facies Modelling: the additional parameters are available to adjust 3D property on

2D-Maps:
∗ on trend set via 2D-Map and(or) VPC;
∗ thickness map (above and below contact).
– The distribution source for MPS is added: initial data or Training Map.
– For 3D interpolation algorithms the new option is available to interpolate only
in the area and merge with "old values" on the boundary (local update of 3D
properties).
– For universal interpolation of horizons and 2D-Maps Discrepancies elimination
may be used in Least Squares algorithm. Universal Interpolation → Least
Squares → Advanced Settings → Discrepancies elimination. Option is en-
abled by default.

5.4. Geology Designer 60

 20.1

• Fluid in place Estimation:

– Reservoir type parameter is added to control all dialogue settings (active and
inactive boxes).
– The possibility to create statistics table for output properties directly from this dia-
logue. Properties → Volumetric properties → tab "Table Creation Settings".
– Reservoir area may be calculated and added to the table.
– Effective thickness may be calculated and added to the table.

• Polygons:

– Point Set calculation via polygon is available.

– The possibility to visualize and edit polygons in table form is available. (Switch to
the Table tab and select polygon).
– Two new options are available while creating polygons in 2D: Put into folder and
Use generic name.

• 2D-Maps:

– The calculation of the map – 2D distance (in horizontal direction) to the specified
object – is available.

• Grid properties:

– The possibility to create property by 2D-Maps is available. Properties → Auxil-

iary Calculations → Property by 2D-Map.
– The possibility to create property via contact is available (for each block: be-
low, above the contact or intersection with the contact). Properties → Auxiliary
Calculations → Property by Contact.
– The possibility to use Mode filter type is available in moving average filter. Prop-
erties → Moving Window Filter.
– The possibility to calculate an intersection of fence polygons with grid is available.
Properties → Auxiliary Calculations → Grid&Fence Polygons Intersection
Property.
– The possibility to create Blocked Wells by property is available. Blocked Wells →
Create Blocked Wells by Property.
– The new calculation is available to calculate the distance from selected object or
several objects:
∗ Height above the horizon (contact);
∗ Distance to Pointset;
∗ Distance to Wells;
∗ Distance to Blocked Wells;

5.4. Geology Designer 61

 20.1

∗ Distance to Grid Blocks that have the selected range of values or index.
– Arithmetic expressions are added to edit grid property locally – Block, Cylinder.

• Workflow:

– The possibility to create/edit wells in the workflow is available.

– The possibility to create screenshots in workflow is available. Workflows →
GUI → Create Screenshot, Add Page to Print.

• Cross-Sections tab:

– For polygons’ projection and fence polygons visualization on the Cross-Section

tab the following options are available:
∗ points of intersection with plane;
∗ depth limit;
∗ different colors for polygons’ parts (projections) lying on opposite sides of
Cross-Section;
∗ polygons’ names;
∗ synchronized visualization settings for all polygons together or each one sep-
arately.

• Tabs, general visualization parameters:

– The possibility to create multiple filters is available for grid properties. Filters
may be synchronized between tabs. Filters are available on the panel Settings, tab
Grids.
– Visualization of markers’ names is available in 3D.
– Zoom in via rectangle selection is available on 2D, holding Alt button.
– Filters may be applied to statistics dialogues. Right mouse click on the object to
see Object Statistics, then use Wells Filter (for logs) or Use filter from active
window (for grid properties).
– Filters for grid blocks may be used for grid properties and Blocked Wells visual-
ization on the Histogram tab.
– The possibility to move filters between windows is available.
– The possibility to delete tabs is available.
– The possibility to rename objects according to the specified template is available.
Right mouse click on the object → Show rename dialogue.
– The possibility to center the palette to zero is available. Additional default palettes
have been added: Delta Palette, Delta Hard Palette, Delta Soft Palette.
– Statistics for properties in the grid block is available via right click and selecting
Block Statistics.

5.4. Geology Designer 62

 20.1

– On the Crossplot tab polygons and trend lines may be created, edited and rotated.
– The possibility to apply filters for VPC, Histogram and Crossplot is available.

• Other:

– Calculator for Blocked Wells is available.

– The possibility to visualize and edit points sets and their attributes in table form is
available. (Switch to the Table tab and select point set).
– Coordinate system library is updated (up to EPSG Version 9.5.5).
– The possibility to record history with objects is available.

5.5. Model Designer

In Model Designer 19.1:

• Import/Export:

– The possibility to import and export grid and properties in the .gslib format is
available.
– The possibility to import and export grid and properties in the .EGRID format is
available.

• Grid:

– New type of coarse grid creation (upscaling) is available. 3D-Grids → Create

Grid → Create Coarse Grid (Upscaling) → Check the box "Flow Based
Permeability Upscaling".
– The possibility to create fine grid (downscaling) is available preserving the proper-
ties of parental blocks. 3D-Grids → Create Grid → Create Fine Grid (Down-
scaling).
– The possibility to create LGR via CARFINBG is available for selected grid prop-
erty. Additional mask should be set selecting blocks for LGR. 3D-Grids → LGR
Operations → Create LGRs by Filter Property → Create LGR With Mask.
– The possibility to create LGR via CARFINBG is available for wells, one LGR for
well with mask. 3D-Grids → LGR Operations → Create LGRs by Wells →
Create LGR With Mask.
– The possibility to create multiple filters is available for grid properties. Filters
may be synchronized between tabs. Filters are available on the panel Settings, tab
Grids.
– The possibility to apply filters for VPC, Histogram and Crossplot is available.

• Tabs, general visualization parameters:

5.5. Model Designer 63

 20.1

– Zoom in via rectangle selection is available on 2D, holding Alt button.

– The possibility to delete tabs is available.
– On the Crossplot tab polygons and trend lines may be created, edited and rotated.
– Arithmetic expressions are added to edit grid property locally – Block, Cylinder.
– Statistics for properties in the grid block is available via right click and selecting
Block Statistics.
– The possibility to rename objects according to the specified template is available.
Right mouse click on the object → Show rename dialogue.
– The possibility to center the palette to zero is available. Additional default palettes
have been added: Delta Palette, Delta Hard Palette, Delta Soft Palette.

• PVT, relative permeabilities:

– Calculation of scaled relative permeabilities is available via right mouse click on

the grid block to choose SPR oil-water, SPR gas-oil, SPR gas-water.
– The possibility to set thermal properties is available using PVT Designer.

• Workflow:

– The possibility to create/edit wells in the workflow is available.

– The possibility to create screenshots in workflow is available. Workflows →
GUI → Create Screenshot, Add Page to Print.

• Well data. Well Rules, Strategies:

– New rules are available to set the keywords WCYCLE and WELLWAG.
– The possibility to delete user keywords via well filter is available.
– Perforation interval in MD may be created while importing the model in the for-
mats IM/ST/GM (the keyword COMPDATMD).

5.6. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 19.1:

• Automatic grouping of components for lumping based on their K-values, acting on light
and heavy components independently, is implemented.

• A procedure of EOS blend is implemented. It creates a common compositional model

for multiple different variants using the adaptive splitting of the original components
into standard ones.

• The possibility to use GOM (Dindoruk and Christman) correlation is available to calcu-
late oil properties.

5.6. PVT Designer 64

 20.1

• The possibility to import compositional variants and black-oil variants from NE/VI
format.

• The possibility to import data from PVCDO table is available.

5.7. Network Designer

In Network Designer 19.1:

• Visualization of formation of gas hydrates in pipes in surface network has been added.

• In the tab Pipe visualization of pipe segments that have gas hydrates formation at speci-
fied composition and inhibitor concentration has been added. The option is turned on by
Settings → Parameters → Properties → Identify Pipe Segments With Hydrates.

• New object – Autochoke has been added. It provides the pressure drop required for
convergence of system of integrated equations.

• Hydrostatic Correction Factor and Friction Correction Factor have been added to pipe
parameters.

5.8. VFP Designer

In VFP Designer 19.1:

• The possibility to calculate VFP tables for injector is available.

• New elements for well construction: a pull (keyword WSEGPULL) and a down-hole
separator (keyword WSEGSEP) have been added.

5.9. Licenses and license server

In tNavigator 19.1:

• Cryptographic protection is supported for the license server access (HTTPS protocol).

5.10. Documentation, Localization

Localization:
• Graphical user interface of simulator was translated to Chinese version.

tNavigator embedded help:

• Embedded help has been added to calculations of Geology Designer.

5.7. Network Designer 65

 20.1

New training tutorials are added for tNavigator 19.1:

• New tutorials for module Network Designer, showing the functionality of integrated
modeling:

• ND1.2. How To Do Integrated Model

In this tutorial we use several tNavigator modules to create integrated model
surface-subsurface starting from dynamic model .data file. In Network Designer we
define objects parameters: pipes, chokes, etc., specify time steps in agreement with
the SCHEDULE section of the dynamic model, set fluid properties the same as in
the dynamic model. To use existing wells from dynamic model in the integrated
project we replace keywords WELSPECS, WELLTRACK and COMPDATMD by
VFP projects, however a VFP table for these wells will be imported. For new wells
we create projects in VFP Designer: specify well geometry, well construction, fluid
composition (using PVT Designer) and then calculate VFP tables. The keyword
IMPORT_PROJECT in the .data file integrates the subsurface and surface parts.
At the end we run integrated model and see results in simulator interface and in
Network Designer interface.

• New tutorials for module Geology Designer:

• GD4.4. How To Generate Attributes

In this tutorial the following options are presented: seismic attribute cube com-
putation (instantaneous amplitude, instantaneous phase, instantaneous frequency,
coherence), seismic attribute interpretation, fault interpretation on seismic.
• GD5.2. How To Create Trends
In this tutorial: we load a satellite image (analogue), digitize a main channel repre-
sented on the satellite image, create a porosity gradient map will be created (using
the point set attributes), digitize a secondary channel, use the boolean operations
on polygons to merge channels and create a new 2D porosity map taking into
account the new channel system.

• New tutorials for module Model Designer:

• MD2.6. How To Find The Best Perforation Interval

Problem statement: The most common way of selecting the perforation is based on
well KH and HC saturation along the well. The manual way of selecting perforation
depths based on visual inspection in well section is very tedious especially if
there are multiple wells and is also subject to human error. Solution provided: In
this tutorial we provide a workflow example (Python code) of automated way of
selecting best perforation intervals for multiple wells in one go. This workflow
scans through the well log (Perm and Oil Saturation (So)) and selects the interval
with best Kh*So. At the end of the workflow it generates COMPDATMD keyword
for all the wells under consideration. This can be directly included within the
simulation file.

5.10. Documentation, Localization 66

 20.1

• New tutorials for module Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty:

• AHM1.10. How To Use Proxy Models

In the case that the full calculation of model variant is time and computer resource
intensive, the use of a Proxy model allows users to rapidly generate an arbitrary
number of model variants using the Monte Carlo method. In graphical interface it
is possible to construct and see the formula of quadratic Proxy model. This expres-
sion can be further used to generate model variants using Monte Carlo sampling
method. The Proxy model provides a quadratic approximation of the parameter
over the selected variants of the model.
• AHM1.11. How To Use Multi Objective Optimization
In this tutorial we perform AHM via Multi-Objective Particle Swarm Optimiza-
tion (MOPSO) algorithm. We analyze results and display the best variants via
Pareto Front representation on the cross plot. Multi-objective optimization allows
to do history matching via optimizing two objective functions (or more) simultane-
ously. In this example first objective function is oil, water and gas rates mismatch.
Second objective function is RFT mismatch. Comparing to the Single-Objective
Optimization algorithm, MPSO can yield a more diverse set of solutions.

• New tutorials for modules PVT Designer, Simulator:

• SIMPVT1.2. How To QC and Improve PVT Tables

In this tutorial we show the example of dynamic model with the following mes-
sages on initialization and simulation. "Negative oil compressibility", "Extrapola-
tion of PVT table was the cause of the negative value of gas viscosity in the block,
it has been reset to small value", etc. We explain the origin of these messages and
then how PVT tables may be corrected in PVT Designer via approximation by
correlation and extension of pressure range. After corrections the model is loaded
and calculated without warnings and errors.

5.10. Documentation, Localization 67

 20.1

6. tNavigator 18.4
The key new features in 18.4 are:

• In tNavigator kernel:

– Local grid refinements getting progressively finer in the vicinity of the fracture are
introduced for XYZ fractures.
– Default setting of results saving was changed. For models in E1/E3 format, if
none of the command line options or keywords (RPTRST, etc.) related to selective
writing of the results are specified, the grid properties will be recorded only on the
first and last step. Previously in this case all grid properties got recorded on all
steps. For models in IM, ST, GE formats the grid properties are still recorded on
all steps.

• In Geology Designer:

– Grid coarsening with corresponding property upscaling is introduced.

– The Multi Point Simulation computation is available, which allows to perform the
interpolation by using multi point statistics method.
– The possibility to perform a fluid in place estimation for a 2D surface is available.
– The possibility to compute seismic attributes and transfer them on geological grids
is available.

• In Model Designer:

– Import of hydraulic fracture data in GOHFER format.

– Entering of hydraulic fracture parameters in tabular form.

• In PVT Designer: thermal variants are supported.

• In VFP Designer: Integration with Model Designer is supported. Each well in the Model
Designer corresponds to a project in VFP Designer.

• In Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty: multitarget optimization by particle

swarm method is supported.

• In Network Designer: Integration with Model Designer is supported. When a dynamic

model is loaded to Model Designer, a corresponding Network Designer project is created
automatically.

6.1. tNavigator kernel

The tNavigator kernel 18.4 supports new functionality for the models in E1, E3, IM, ST, and
GE format:

6. tNavigator 18.4 68
 20.1

GPU Calculations:
• Multiple GPUs on a single node can be used for the solution of system of linear equa-
tions.

For models in E1 and E3 formats:

• The possibility to connect analytic aquifers to LGR is available (keyword AQAN-
CONL).

• Modification of pore volume is available for models with keywords ROCKTAB/ROCK-

TABH (keywords HMRREF, HMMROCKT).

• Depth correction flag RES of the keyword WPAVE is available (the hydrostatic head is
calculated using a representative density for the fluid in the reservoir).

For models in IM, ST, GE formats:

• For models in GE/IM formats surface tensions can be specified as properties when using
the J function option (keywords SRFTNW, SRFTNG).

• For models in GE/IM formats initial reservoir pressure can be used as reference one
when calculating pore volume (keyword DEPLETION).

• For models in ST format the default initial component composition is available.

• For models in GE/IM formats the option DAMP–PCOW–TROIL is available for hys-
teresis of capillary pressure .

• For models in ST format the option allowing to adjust initial water and oil saturations
is available to improve a robustness of calculations (keyword SAT_ADJUST).

• The possibility to add a list of well groups under the group control that performs a fluid
recycling injection (keyword GPRODGROUP).

For models in MO format:

• The vertical scaling of relative phase permeabilities is available (keywords YKOG,
YKOW, YKRG, YKRW).

Special options:
• A grid refinement around fracture zone for XYZ fractures is available.

• For thermal and compositional models in E1 and E3 formats the component composition
can be specified in each block for the option NEI (keyword TNAVCTRL NEI).

• For compositional models in E3 format there is a possibility to define a method of

transition of hydrocarbon phases (oil, gas, NGL) to standard conditions after separator
(keywords SEPDEN, DENSTRMIX).

6.1. tNavigator kernel 69

 20.1

• For models in tNav format new options specifying aquifer’s connection type for Dual
Porosity/Dual Permeability models (options BOUNDARYM/RESBNDM, BOUND-
ARYF/RESBNDF, DEPTHM/DEPTHF of the keyword AQUGP).

• A modification of Carter-Tracy’s aquifer has been added for more accurate modelling
of bottom water (option BD of the keyword AQUGP).

• For models in E3 format the temperature scaling of relative phase permeabilities and
capillary pressure in compositional isothermal models.

• Options providing solver settings for segmented wells are available (options MAXSEG-
WELLIT, TOLSEGWELL of keyword RUNCTRL).

• The option STRICT_CONST_FRACTURE_THICKNESS of the keyword TNAVCTRL

providing a conservation of central layer width under grid refinement using the keyword
PLNRFRAC_TEMPLATE and INNERWIDTH has been added.

• Options controlling the logic of properties initialization in the inactive blocks that trans-
fers to active ones when penetrating by hydraulic fracture have been added (The option
FRACTURE_INACTIVE_BLOCK_PROPERTIES_LOGIC of the keyword TNAVC-
TRL should be set as NEAREST_IJK_ACTIVE_BLOCK).

• Keyword IMPORT_PROJECT is available to create integrated model.

Data input-output:
• Default setting of results saving was changed. For models in E1/E3 format, if none of
the command line options or keywords (RPTRST, etc.) related to selective writing of
the results are specified, the grid properties will be recorded only on the first and last
step. Previously in this case all grid properties got recorded on all steps. For models in
IM, ST, GE formats the grid properties are still recorded on all steps.

• An option of recording the last computed step is introduced, so that a crashed calcu-
lation could be resumed smoothly afterwards. It is activated in console version by the
command line switch --dump-res-last and in GUI via Settings → Options →
Advanced → Dump last calculated step (simulator) or Settings → Options → Cal-
culation options for new jobs (queue manager).

• SUMMARY mnemonics for multisegment wells are supported: SOFRF, SOFRS, SOFT,
SOFTA, SWFT, SWFTA, SGFRF, SGFT, SGFTA.

• SUMMARY mnemonics for phase potentials of shut/stopped wells are supported:

WGPP2, WOPP2, WWPP2.

• RPTRST mnemonics for phase velocities are supported: VELOIL, VELWAT, VELGAS.

• Output of well names to .SMSPEC file (WGNAMES) is supported.

6.1. tNavigator kernel 70

 20.1

6.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator GUI 18.4:

• 3D grid properties can now be visualized with partial transparency.

• Interface of importing arbitrary graphs for visualization has been modified: now the
imported graph can be assigned any type and units.

• User graphs created in the Graph Calculator can now be used in Bubble Maps. For
example, you may visualize cumulative production over a certain period.

• For remote GUI the possibility to see the number of nodes in queues has been added in
manager settings.

• Output of indexes of LGR blocks into log–file was improved. In 2D and 3D views
indexes of all parent blocks have been added.

• The visualization of the following data has been added:

– User properties WORKxxx, IWORKxxx in the category Initial.

– Thermal conductivities.
– Biot constant in geomechanical model.

6.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty

In Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 18.4:

• Specifying variables and algorithms:

– Multi-objective Particle Swarm Optimization algorithm has been added.

– Monte Carlo experimental design has been added.
– The possibility to visualize the Pareto front in the Crossplot has been added.
– The possibility to calculate the multiple number of model variants using the proxy
formula by substituting variables distributed by Monte Carlo method in it.
– Discrete distribution of variables is available.

• Objective function:

– The possibility to create a list of objective functions is available. Objective func-

tions are on the separate tab in GUI.
– The possibility to calculate linear history matching along with quadratic.
– In the objective function configuration the filter for producers/injectors has been
added.

6.2. Graphical User Interface 71

 20.1

• Integration with Model Designer and Geology Designer:

– To work with fractures new features have been added in workflow: Fractures →
Adjust → Adjust Fracture Template, Adjust Fracture Stage, Adjust Fracture
Arithmetic.
– Matching by target function in Geology Designer is introduced. It can be used, for
example, to match reserves with the approved figure.

6.4. Geology Designer

In Geology Designer 18.4:
• Seismic:

– The possibility to interpret a horizon using several loaded SEG-Y files is added.
– In Seismic tab, the possibility to move the orthogonal section to the visualized
section (inline or crossline) and to switch to this section is added.
– The possibility to select the data by depth, time, line or CMP is now available
(Delay in Z axis, Min Z, Max Z Import → Type && Geometry).
– The possibility to work with data in depth is added: import, visualization and
interpretation (horizons and faults) are now available.
– Velocity cubes from checkshot data can be computed.
– Basic seismic attributes can be computed: coherence, instantaneous amplitude,
instantaneous frequency, instantaneous phase (Seismic Survey 3D → Calculate
Attributes).
– The possibility to transfer seismic attributes on geological grids is added (for seis-
mic data in depth).
– The possibility to convert seismic faults to depth is added. Faults can be created
by seismic faults (Faults → Create Fault by Seismic Fault).

• Import/Export:

– The possibility to import/export grids in Cornerpoint Grid (CORP) in NE/VI for-

mat is added.
– The possibility to import/export grids in CORNERS format.
– The possibility to load faults and polygons in Z-Map Plus format is added.
– The possibility to load well data (markers, well logs...) for areas without well
trajectories is added. The possibility to elongate the well trajectory if needed is
also added to the markers and well logs import windows (Logs or Markers →
Import → Elongate Well Trajectory if necessary).
– The possibility to load the wells production history from a database using Python
scripts in workflows is added.

6.4. Geology Designer 72

 20.1

– The export of markers in table format is added (Markers → Export → Well/-

Markers Table).

• Well data, logs:

– UWI is supported when loading and working with wells and well logs.
– The angle, depth and azimuth of well trajectories can now be displayed in the
Wells Tables.
– The possibility to cut the trajectory by depth and by markers for the visualization
is available for 2D, 3D, and Sections tabs.
– The following calculations for dealing with logs were added:
∗ Smoothing with moving median filter.
∗ Smoothing with moving average filter.
∗ Gaussian smoothing.
∗ Normalization by Min and Max values.
∗ Normalization by average and RMS.

• Well Section tab:

– The possibility to hide tracks without data is added (option Hide Empty Track)
– A compact version of depth TVDSS/MD scale is added (the size of serifs is re-
duced, for depths values the number of decimals, the font size is reduced and
the numbers switch to a vertical location when the scale width is minimal which
allows a better visualization).
– Settings for markers and horizons are added to templates.

• Grids:

– The possibility to upscale the entire grid and its properties to a coarser one (3D-
Grids → Create Grids → Create Coarse Grid) is added.
– The possibility to resample properties from one grid to another is added. The grids
can have different global and block sizes, different azimuth angles and everything.
– The possibility to set a layering horizon during the grid building is added.

• Structural model:

– The Structural Model object is added for building a consistent structural frame-
work, taking into account all available input data for the construction, and for
calculating the thicknesses of the created formations.

• Interpolation:

– The Multi Point Simulation computation is available, which allows to perform the
interpolation by using multi point statistics method.

6.4. Geology Designer 73

 20.1

– The possibility to populate the grid from an assumed probability distribution (nor-
mal, log-normal etc...) as input data is added.
• Fluid in place Estimation:
– The possibility to perform a fluid in place estimation for a 2D surface is available
(2D-Maps → Calculate Volumetric Map).
– A statistics table of fluid in place estimation can be generated for a 2D surface
fluid-in-place estimation and can be used for the uncertainty analysis (Table →
Create Table from Map).
• Polygons:
– Boolean operations on polygons (Subtractions, Unions and Intersections of poly-
gons) are available (Polygons → Perform boolean operations on polygons).
– 2D- Maps and horizons can be merged in order to build a surface using poly-
gons, 2D-Maps or horizons and constant depth values as input data Horizons →
Auxiliary computations → Horizons Merging, 2D-Maps → Auxiliary compu-
tations → 2D-Maps Merging
• 2D-Maps:
– The point sets attributes are taken into account during the Universal Interpolation
for 2D-Maps.
– 2D-Maps can be cut by polygons.
• Workflows:
– The possibility to launch an external program from workflows is added.
– The possibility to launch a workflow from another workflow is added.
– The possibility to open a dynamic model from a workflow is added (Workflows →
Export → Open or reload dynamic model).
• Cross-Sections tab:
– The well names can be displayed in the Cross-Section window. The associated
settings are also added.
– The possibility to enter the numerical value of the scale in the settings window is
added. The hot keys for zooming: up and down is available.
• Tabs, general visualization parameters:
– Synchronization of certain properties of visualization tabs is supported (selected
objects, camera position, filters).
– Restoration of closed visualization tabs is supported (View → Windows → Re-
store).

6.4. Geology Designer 74

 20.1

– Global rotation points for 3D are introduced. They can be shown on all 2D and
3D views.
– 3D grid properties can now be visualized with partial transparency.
– Statistics on every objects can now be called from the object tree, regardless of the
currently active visualization window.

• Other options:

– Undefined value can now be explicitly specified in the calculator and used in the
expressions.

6.5. Model Designer

In Model Designer 18.4:

• Hydraulic fracture:

– Import of hydraulic fracture data in GOHFER format.

– Entering of hydraulic fracture parameters in tabular form.

• Integrated modeling:

– Integration of VFP Designer with Model Designer is supported. Each well in the
Model Designer corresponds to a project in VFP Designer.
– Integration of Network Designer with Model Designer is supported. When a dy-
namic model is loaded to Model Designer, a corresponding Network Designer
project is created automatically.

• Grids:

– Creation of unstructured grids is supported (CARFINBG + INNERWIDTH).

– Loading and exporting models using the COARSEN option is supported.

• Tabs and visualization options:

– Synchronization of certain properties of visualization tabs is supported (selected

objects, camera position, filters).
– Restoration of closed visualization tabs is supported (View → Windows → Re-
store).
– Global rotation points for 3D are introduced. They are shown on all 2D and 3D
views.
– 3D grid properties can now be visualized with partial transparency.
– Statistics on every objects can now be called from the object tree, regardless of the
currently active visualization window.

6.5. Model Designer 75

 20.1

• Relative permeabilities:
– RP tables can now be grouped by folders.
– Export of RP tables in NE/VI format is now supported.
• Miscellaneous:
– Interface for creating rules that specify the frequency of time step recording is
introduced.
– Many model parameters are now supported in workflow.
– Double porosity for aquifers is now supported.
– Many development rules can now be specified in tabular form.
– Vector fields can now be visualized.
– Trends in crossplots are made geometry objects. It is possible to create, edit, and
selectively visualize them.

6.6. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 18.4:
• A tree of thermal variants is added, similar to those of compositional and black oil
variants.
• For black oil variants, new way of defining PVT data is supported (tN-compatible
keywords BOT, VOT, COT, BGUST, VGUST).

6.7. Network Designer

In Network Designer 18.4:
• The Network Designer integrates with Model Designer. When importing the existed
model into the Model Designer the project of Network Designer will be automatically
created with a possibility of its further modification.
• New object – Automatic Choke has been added, in order to specify upper limits of phase
rates and pressure for wells and groups of wells.
• New object – Injector has been added.
• New object – Limits, used for group control options, has been added.
• New object – Automatic Pump has been added, in order to specify lower limit of
pressure for wells and groups of wells.
• The automatic update of results of network calculation when running the integrated
network–reservoir model.
• The possibility to disconnect any end of pipe from the connected object has been added.

6.6. PVT Designer 76

 20.1

6.8. VFP Designer

In VFP Designer 18.4:

• The VFP Designer integrates with Model Designer. In the Model Designer each well
corresponds to a project of VFP Designer.

• New construction elements of multisegment well has been added: sub-critical valve
(keyword WSEGVALV), autonomous inflow control device (keyword WSEGAICD),
spiral inflow control device (keyword WSEGSICD).

• The possibility to calculate solely a hydrostatic pressure drop is available (When calcu-
lating a VFP table select the Correlation type – Hydrostatic only).

• Import of VFP tables in NE/VI format is available.

6.9. Compatibility with previous versions

In tNavigator 18.4:

• Default setting of results saving was changed. For models in E1/E3 format, if none of
the command line options or keywords (RPTRST, etc.) related to selective writing of
the results are specified, the grid properties will be recorded only on the first and last
step. Previously in this case all grid properties got recorded on all steps. For models in
IM, ST, GE formats the grid properties are still recorded on all steps.

• The logic of calculation for API groups has been changed, the previous logic may be
switched on via the keyword TNAVCTRL option API_GROUP_LOGIC_PRE182.

6.10. Licenses and license server

In tNavigator 18.4:

• Usage of one or two GPUs on one node calculation is included to the Black oil license.
For every two additional GPUs one more Black Oil license is required.

• Licensing in the presence of keywords IMPORT_NETWORK and IMPORT_WELL.

One license per model is required, even if the keywords are used in it multiple times:

– With IMPORT_NETWORK: Network Designer license;

– With IMPORT_WELL: similar to using VFP Designer, the first available of Model
Designer, Network Designer, and Geology Designer licenses is used.
– With both IMPORT_NETWORK and IMPORT_WELL: Network Designer li-
cense;
– With IMPORT_PROJECT → license depending on projects types that are included
via this keyword.

6.8. VFP Designer 77

 20.1

6.11. Documentation
New training tutorials are added for tNavigator 18.4:

• Introductory overview presentations on all modules:

• SIM0.1. Simulator Overview.

• AHM0.1. AHMUncertainty Overview.
• GD0.1. Geology Designer Overview.
• MD0.1. Model Designer Overview.
• PVT0.1. PVTDesigner Overview.
• PVT0.2. PVTDesigner Experiments.
• ND0.1. Integrated Modeling.
• VFP0.1. VFPDesigner Overview.

• New tutorials on Model Designer:

• MD1.1. How To Analyze Model in Model Designer.

In this training tutorial we load and analyze existing dynamic model: 3D, grid
properties, statistics, 2D, contour lines, Histogram, Filters to calculate fluid-in-
place for FIP regions, Crossplots, graphic filters for Crossplots, Cross Sections
horizontal and vertical. Settings and Visualization options, Wells and Properties
Filters. Run dynamic model and analyze Rates, Totals, etc on Graph Templates for
FIELD and wells. Check the quality of history matching (Hist vs Calc crossplots).
• MD1.5. Voronoi Diagrams.
This is a method of dividing a 3D property into regions (as many regions as there
are wells) in such a way that the boundary between two "neighboring" regions is
perpendicular to the straight line connecting the wells (region centers) and runs
halfway between two wells. Voronoi diagrams are used for a rough estimation of
fluid-in-place in the well’s regions (the well’s fluid-in-place in its Voronoi region).
Voronoi diagrams are also used for estimating a well’s drainage area.
• MD2.1. How To Add Wells.
In this training tutorial we will: add vertical and horizontal wells in GUI, perforate
well and edit a well trajectory with a mouse, visualize DLS (Dog leg severity),
specify well controls and limits for the development strategy, add a branch for the
horizontal well, run model and see results on graphs, export well trajectories as
WELLTRACK (X, Y, Z, Measured Depth).
• MD2.2. Local Grid Refinement.
In this tutorial we provide an overview of all tools to create LGR: Create LGRs
around the wells, Create LGRs within the defined box, Create LGRs via Property
Filter.

6.11. Documentation 78
 20.1

• MD2.4. How To Update Schedule.

In this tutorial we consider an example of adding new historic data to the model
(production data, new well trajectories, perforations).

6.11. Documentation 79
 20.1

7. tNavigator 18.3
The key improvements in 18.3 are:

• In tNavigator kernel:

– End-point scaling for relative permeabilities is available for models with low salin-
ity option LOWSALT and for models with surfactant injection SURFACT.
– Default settings for the amount of results output have been changed. Instead of
previously used "all data at all time steps" now grid properties are saved at the
time steps according to model input deck (RPTRST), graphs are saved at all time
steps.

• In Geology Designer:

– The first implementation of the tool to provide the collective work of several users
with one project through the mechanism of transferring objects between projects
has been added.
– Collocated Cokriging algorithm and Kriging Variance calculation is available in
3D interpolation.

• In PVT Designer: non-equilibrium phase state may be modeled for compositional mod-
els (different rate of gas liberation from liquid and its dissolution).

• Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty: quadratic Proxy model may be built from
selected model’s variants. Resulting formula of Proxy model is available to the user
and may be used by third-party tools for additional analysis by Monte Carlo sampling
methods and others.

7.1. tNavigator kernel

The tNavigator kernel 18.3 supports new functionality for the models in E1, E3, IM, ST, and
GE format:
For models in E1 and E3 formats:
• End-point scaling for relative permeabilities is available for models with low salinity
option LOWSALT (keywords LSWL, LSWLPC, LSWU, LPCW, LSOGCR, LSOWCR,
LSWCR, LKRW, LKRWR, LKRO, LKRORW, LKRORG).

• End-point scaling for relative permeabilities is available for models with surfactant
injection SURFACT (keywords SSWL, SSWCR, SSWU, SSOWCR, SKRW, SKRWR,
SKRO, SKRORW).

• For multisegment wells the possibility to choose rules for scaling the interpolated pres-
sure drop according to the length or depth span of each segment is available (parameter
7 of the keyword WSEGTABL).

7. tNavigator 18.3 80
 20.1

• The possibility to set well control mode via UDQ in the 2nd parameter of the keyword
WTMULT is available.
• The possibility to specify the number of Newton method iterations for a time step,
for which well targets will be updated (for wells working under group control or with
limits on the amount of pressure drop) is available in the SCHEDULE section (keyword
NUPCOL).
• Various methods of averaging the density in the wellbore are available (parameter 145
of the keyword OPTIONS, parameter 44 of the keyword OPTIONS3 and new parame-
ters of the keyword RUNCTRL (WELLDENWEIGHTOPEN and WELLDENWEIGHT-
STOP)).
• The possibility to use wild card ’?’ as a well name in the keyword WELSPECS inside
ACTIONW is available.

For models in E3 format:

• For compositional models the modified LBC correlation may be used to calculate vis-
cosity of the hydrocarbon phase (keyword VCOMPACT).
• For thermal models non-equilibrium initialization is available (keyword NEI).
• For compositional models the option of H2S solution is available (keyword H2SSOL).

For models in IM, ST, GE formats:

• For compositional models in GE format the possibility to set temperature gradients for
volume shifts is available (keywords VSHIF1, TREFVS).
• For thermal models in ST format the possibility to model chemical reaction that deviate
from equilibrium is available (keywords RXEQFOR, RXEQBAK, RXEQBASE).
• For thermal models in ST format COMPLEX method of block thermal conductivity
calculation is available for models with solid phase.
• Additional possibilities are available to set hydraulic fractures via LGR (keywords IN-
NERWIDTH, BLOCKGROUP).

Special options:
• For compositional models in E3 format the possibility to set temperature gradients for
volume shifts is available (keywords VSHIF1, TREFVS).
• The possibility to control the logic of properties calculation for inactive blocks that
are in the area of hydraulic fracture (for the keyword TNAVCTRL option FRAC-
TURE_INACTIVE_BLOCK_PROPERTIES_LOGIC).
• For models in E1, E3 format additional possibilities are available to set hydraulic frac-
tures via LGR (keywords CARFIN_BG, INNERWIDTH, BG_xxx).

7.1. tNavigator kernel 81

 20.1

Data input-output:
• In SUMMARY section a new mnemonic WBP0 is available (1-point pressure average
recalculated to reference depth).

• New mnemonics have been added to the keyword RPTRST: ZMF, ALLPROPS, SUR-
FCNM, SURFBLK, SURFACT, SURFMAX, SURFST.

• New mnemonics are available in SUMMARY section: FEIR, FEIT, FEPR, FEPT, GEIR,
GEIT, GEPR, GEPT, WEPR, WEPT, WEIR, WEIT, FOIRP, FHMPT, FHMIT, FHMPR,
FHMIR, FRPV, WGPP2, WODN and WGDN.

7.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator GUI 18.3:

• The possibility to open in Model Designer is available from simulator’s graphical inter-
face. A new project is created when the button Open in Model Designer is pressed and
all data from the current model is imported to that project.

• The possibility to set global options to dump results binary files by default is available.
In tNavigator main window → Options → Models → Save graphs and properties
binaries.

• The possibility to set Z-scaling as a number is available in the settings of 3D window.

Hot keys to change the scale are: up and down.

• Functionality of palette has been extended: Use Local Precision, Show Histogram and
Max Histogram Value.

• Graphs:

– Visualization of the new graph WBP0 is available (1-point pressure average recal-
culated to reference depth).
– Graph Calculator: access to external Python modules is simplified. In tNaviga-
tor main window → Options → Path → Use external Python library, Check
Python3.dll, Manually set path to Python modules.
– The possibility to create folders in Graph Templates is available.
– In Graph Templates the possibility to create arbitrary crossplot is available (Tem-
plate Settings → Axes options → Choose parameters for X and Y axis).

7.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty

In Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 18.3:

• Pareto Chart may be built via Spearman correlation.

7.2. Graphical User Interface 82

 20.1

• Quadratic Proxy model may be built from selected model’s variants. Tools for quality
check and the resulting formula of Proxy model is available.
• In graphical interface the following tabs are combined in one tab (tab Results Table in
the version 18.3 is a combination of tabs from 18.2: Results Table, Mismatches Table,
Model Variables). Visualization of data for objects (groups, wells) has been added.
• HM module may be used for models with reservoir coupling option (no backward
compatibility).
• Integration with modules Model Designer and Geology Designer:
– The following tools are available when AHM module is started from Geology
Designer: histograms, crossplots, CDF graphs and MDS tab.
– The following tools are available when AHM module is started from Model De-
signer: new interface for RP tables, optimization for the case with many saturation
regions.

7.4. Geology Designer

In Geology Designer 18.3:
• Grids:
– Option Import All Properties has been added to the calculation Import. Load
Grid.
• Interpolation:
– A new interpolation algorithm is available for 2D Maps and horizons that allows
to use different data simultaneously as a source data: well markers, point sets,
polygons and horizons. Calculations → Universal Interpolation.
– Collocated Cokriging is available in 3D interpolation: Property Interpolations
(Zones, Regions), Facies Modelling (Zones, Regions).
– Kriging Variance may be calculated for 3D interpolation: Property Interpolations
(Zones, Regions), Facies Modelling (Zones, Regions).
• Wells data, Logs, Well Section:
– New well attribute "symbol" and global table of "symbols" may be used (list of
svg files). Wells may be displayed with their symbols on 2D.
– The possibility to merge logs and to load logs with the same name without over-
writing is available. Calculation Merge Logs with merge types: Ignore, Merge,
Overwrite.
– Discrete log labels may be used to color logs on the Well Section (set template and
use option Show Discrete Log Labels).

7.4. Geology Designer 83

 20.1

– Well logs may be displayed on the Well Section with defined range of uncertainty
(option Show Uncertainty Range).
– Well logs and trajectories may be loaded from the data base.
– Functionality of Well Selection on 2D is extended: wells may by selected for
correlation profile one by one, via brush or inside selected area.

• Volumetric Properties, Connected Components:

– Geometrical Volume, Net Volume, Pore Volume and HCPV may be calculated
separately for oil zone, gas zone, oil+gas zone and for entire grid. Properties →
Calculations → Calculate Volumetric Properties.
– The possibility to calculate the number of blocks in each component is avail-
able. Parameter Component Counts Property in Properties → Calculations →
Connected Components.
– Filter Small Connected Components is available in Connected Components tab.

• Faults:

– Faults visualization is available on 2D views.

– The possibility to export all faults is available.
– The possibility to create fault from point set is available Approximate Pointsets
by Surface.

• Cross-Section tab for cross-section visualization:

– Visualization of faults, perforations and well logs is available.

• Polygons:

– The possibility to calculate area inside polygon is available (Calculate Polygon

Area).
– The possibility to create polygon via intersection of two horizons or horizon and
depth is available (Polygon by Horizon Intersection).
– The possibility to load polygon from file defining columns that should be used is
available.

• Other options:

– The possibility to transfer objects between projects is available. Document →

Project Data Exchanger.
– Thickness Map may be calculated between horizons. 2D-Maps → Auxiliary Cal-
culations → Thickness Map by Horizons.
– Loaded User Map Images may be visualized in 3D.

7.4. Geology Designer 84

 20.1

– The possibility to set Z-scaling as a number is available in the settings of 3D

window. Hot keys to change the scale are: up and down.
– Functionality of palette has been extended: Use Local Precision, Show Histogram
and Max Histogram Value.

7.5. Model Designer

In Model Designer 18.3:

• Cases tab:

– The possibility to add to dynamic model only selected faults is available in

Cases → Properties → Faults. Transmissibility multiplier, diffusivity multiplier
and threshold pressure may be set.

• Grid properties tools:

– Regions may be visualized in dynamic model after it’s initialization.

– Grid properties may be changed on time steps (in SCHEDULE).
– The possibility to set Z-scaling as a number is available in the settings of 3D
window. Hot keys to change the scale are: up and down.
– Functionality of palette has been extended: Use Local Precision, Show Histogram
and Max Histogram Value.

• Wells data and Well Rules:

– The possibility to load parameters of hydraulic fractures in a table form is available.

– Functionality of Well Selection on 2D is extended: wells may by selected for
correlation profile one by one, via brush or inside selected area.
– Group hierarchy may be exported from the rule Create Group Hierarchy in the
form of the keyword GRUPTREE or lists well-group, group-well etc.
– The following keywords may be recognized as a separate rules (group hierarchy
and wells’ parameters) when data is loaded from existing model: WELSPECS,
WELSPECL, WELLSPEC, GRUPTREE.

• Other options:

– In the tab Fluid Properties Equilibration Data and Rock compressibility may
be set by default via grid. This option is available via right mouse click Create
Default by Grid.

7.5. Model Designer 85

 20.1

7.6. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 18.3:

• 3-phase VLW flash is available in CCE experiment.

• Non-equilibrium flash may be used. The following experiments are available: NCCE,
RELAXATION, NCVD. Nonequilibrium parameters may be matched to sample mea-
sured data.

• Fingerprint plot may be visualized.

• Parameter of Chueh-Prausnitz correlation may be changed in BIC calculation.

• Critical point may be used as a control parameter to make objective function in matching
weights for lumping.

• Comments may be added to the variants.

7.7. Network Designer

In Network Designer 18.3:

• Several variants of network may created, calculated and compared via graphs and tables.

• The possibility to create Group of Elements is available.

• Input of well production in the total node production may be visualized in a form of
Bubble Maps.

7.8. Compatibility with previous versions

In tNavigator 18.3:

• Default settings for the amount of results output has been changed. Instead of previously
used "all data at all time steps" now grid properties are saved at the time steps according
to model input deck (RPTRST), graphs are saved at all time steps.

• In simulator INIT keyword must be specified in GRID section to export initial properties
in binary format E1/E3.

• In Graph Calculator the syntax of aggregation and retrieval of individual values from
graphs has been altered (no backward compatibility).

• AHM module may be used for models with reservoir coupling option (no backward
compatibility).

7.6. PVT Designer 86

 20.1

7.9. Documentation
New training tutorials are added for tNavigator 18.3:
• For module Simulator:
– SIM6.6. How To Use VLWFlash CO2 – Modeling of oil displacement with al-
ternating injection of water and CO2 for enhanced oil recovery. Compared to pure
CO2 injection, the alternating water/CO2 variant is cheaper, since much of the
cost is due to CO2. Alternating injection of water and CO2 in varying ratio may
be efficient for heterogeneous reservoirs. In this tutorial there is a comparison for
two models: with CO2 solubility in water phase and without it’s dissolution. To
calculate the phase equilibrium in gas-water-oil system, we use the VLW_FLASH
option of the FLASHCTRL keyword.
• For modules Simulator, Model Designer, Assisted History Matching and Uncer-
tainty:
– COMMON1.4. How To Use Graph Calculator Python – Graph Calculator is
designed to create additional user graphs and is available in Simulator Graphical
Interface, AHM and Uncertainty module, Model Designer. In this tutorial we pro-
vide description of Python’s syntax and logic, special functions for working with
model objects, libraries import. There are examples of objective function creation
for AHM and Uncertainty module via Python scripts to solve the following tasks:
∗ Matching the displacement characteristic of a model against the reference data.
∗ Match model on tracer analysis.
• For module Geology Designer:
– GD1.5 How To Work With Logs – In this tutorial we provide a detailed descrip-
tion how to work with log data and use Calculator, for example:
∗ Move digital log data or digitized logs to the log interpreting environment
∗ Display all logging data
∗ Edit logs to eliminate invalid data
∗ Calculate a new log (corresponding to the volume of shales) using a formula
∗ Depth shift all log curves not recorded with the base log
∗ Calculate the average value of a log between 2 markers and visualize it on 2D
• For modules Model Designer, Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty:
– MDAHM1.1 How To Use Molar Rates In AHM – Back-allocation method de-
scribed in this tutorial is based on total mass (molar) historical rates at a field level
as well as historical bottom hole pressures (BHP), tubing head pressures (THP)
and phase water rates at well level. Wells are controlled by group historical total
molar rates at field level. Total Molar rate is calculated based on well potential.
The following tasks are solved in this tutorial:

7.9. Documentation 87
 20.1

∗ Load historical molar rates at the field level (Model Designer)

∗ Create Group Controls by historical data, set group control by historical molar
rates for wells (Model Designer)
∗ Back-allocation and history match (AHM)
– MDAHM1.2 How To Use 3D Cos Transf Workflow AHM – This tutorial shows
accelerated Model Designer to AHM workflow based on Discrete Cosine Trans-
form (DCT) of permeability property:
∗ DCT Algorithm overview (theory)
∗ Building in MD workflow for permeability amplitude parametrization
∗ Sensitivity analysis
∗ Automatic history matching
∗ Analysis of history matching results in MD

7.9. Documentation 88
 20.1

8. tNavigator 18.2
The key improvements in 18.2 are:

• Integration of modules Simulator, Network Designer, VFP Designer to build integrated

models of reservoir-surface network.

• In simulator: speed up in compositional model calculation by using vector instructions

of CPU+GPU processors.

• In simulator: the possibility to run restart models on different grid is available (with a
set of LGRs different from those in the base model).

• In Geology Designer: the possibility to create an experiment for Geology Designer

tables without building a complete dynamic model is supported. This allows to perform
a complete uncertainty analysis for geological parameters.

• In Geology Designer: the possibility to create several grids in the same project is sup-
ported: create, display and edit additional grids.

• In PVT Designer: the calculation of gas hydrates formation is implemented; visualiza-

tion of the hydrates curve is available on the Phase Envelope tab.

• In Model Designer: Cases Manager, that provides the possibilities to add comments
to cases, group cases, create folders with cases, set in cases arbitrary properties of
RUNSPEC, GRID, PROPS, SOLUTION sections, add development strategies.

8.1. tNavigator kernel

The tNavigator kernel 18.2 supports new functionality for the models in E1, E3, IM, ST, and
GE format:
CPU+GPU calculation

• The option to calculate a vectorized compositional flash on GPU is enabled by default

(if GPU is used in simulation).

For models in E1 and E3 formats:

• The possibility to switch on/off LGR on calculation time steps and the possibility to use
them in ACTION keywords is available (keywords LGRON/LGROFF).

• The possibility to set well temperature cutback tables is available (keywords WELLTCB,
WELLTCBT, TCBDIMS).

• The possibility to set parameters of Palmer-Mansoori rock compaction for coal bed
methane model is available (keyword ROCKPAMA).

8. tNavigator 18.2 89
 20.1

• The possibility to set a sigma factor multiplier as a function of pressure to take into
account a modification of the matrix-fracture coupling caused by rock compaction for
dual porosity models (keyword ROCKTSIG).

• The possibility to create a new scanning drainage curve if an imbibition process on a

scanning imbibition curve is reversed into a drainage process (Killough model) (option
NEW of the 6th parameter of the keyword EHYSTR).

• The possibility to set ALQ as user defined quantity UDQ is available (parameter 12 of
the keyword WCONPROD).

• The possibility to set constant gas fuel usage rate as user defined quantity UDQ is
available (parameter 2 of the keyword GRUPFUEL).

For models in E3 format:

• For thermal models the possibility to use correlations for all viscosity models is available
(option CORRELATION of the keyword OILVISCC).

For models in IM, ST, GE formats:

• RP and Capillary pressure hysteresis is implemented. The following keywords may be

used:

– Format IM: HYSKRO (*CARLSON, *KILLOUGH *HYEXO), *HYSKRW

(*KILLOUGH/*KILLOUGH_MOD *HYEXW), *HYSKRG, *SWTI, *SOR-
MAX. Capillary pressure hysteresis: *SWT, *SLT, *SGT (5th column), *EPSPC,
*EPSPCG.
– Format GE: *HYSKROW (*CARLSON, *KILLOUGH *HYEXO *SWTI),
*HYSKROG, *HYSKRG. Capillary pressure hysteresis: *SWT, *SLT, *SGT (5th
column), *EPSPC.
– Format ST: *HYS_KRO (*CARLSON *SOTMAX, *HYEXO *HYEXW *SWTI,
*KILLOUGH, *KILLOUGH_MOD ), *HYS_KRG (*CARLSON *SGTMAX,
*KILLOUGH *HYEXG *SLTI), *HYS_PCOW, *HYS_PCOG, SWT, *SLT (5th
column), *HYS_LEVEL.

• The possibility to use restart models is available (keywords RESTART, RESDATE).

For models in GE format:

• Rowe-Chou correlation for water density calculation with dissolved salt NaCl (keywords
*AQUEOUS-DENSITY *ROWE-CHOU, *SALINITY).

For models in IM format:

• API tracking option is implemented (keywords *MODEL *API-INT, *PVTAPI, *API-

GRAD, *BOTAPI, *VOTAPI, *API, *APIT).

8.1. tNavigator kernel 90

 20.1

• The possibility to use grid properties PERMI/PERMJ/PERMK in the Well section is

available.

• The possibility to use hysteresis rock compaction is available (keyword CROCKTABH).

For models in MO format:

• The possibility to modify parameters of correlation used for calculation of critical Z-

factors in an equation-of-state simulation is available (keyword ZCOR).

Special options:

• The flexible hysteresis settings are available for E1, E3 format models: for each region its
own hysteresis model can be set, hysteresis parameters can be set for each phase curve
of two-phase system, Carlson’s analytical model (keywords HYSTOPTS/HYSTOPTSR,
HYSTKRW/HYSTKRWR, HYSTKROW/HYSTKROWR, HYSTKRG/HYSTKRGR,
HYSTKROG/HYSTKROGR).

• The possibility to change porosity and permeability in SCHEDULE section is available

(PORO, PERMX, PERMY, PERMZ).

• For compositional models in E3 format, for carbon dioxide dissolution option CO2SOL
three-phase flash water-gas-oil is implemented (parameter VLW_FLASH of the key-
word FLASHCTRL).

• For compositional models in E3 format, nonequilibrium thermodynamic processes are

taken into account (keyword NEFLASH).

• The possibility to use restart model with a set of LGRs different from base model is
available.

• The possibility of equilibration of initial water saturation SWATINIT via capillary pres-
sure shift is available (6th parameter of the keyword ENDSCALE).

• Automatic transition of perforations set via COMPDATMD to local/global grid blocks

when LGR is activated/deactivated.

• In the keyword COMPDATMD perforations may be set in fracture area defined via
FRACTURE_WELL.

• In the keyword FRACTURE_TEMPLATE a new parameter REFINEMENT may be

used to set the type of local grid refinement.

• In the keyword FRACTURE_ARITHMETIC the possibility to change the following

grid properties is available: PORO, NTG, MULTPV, PVTNUM.

• For black-oil model in the keyword FRACTURE_ARITHMETIC the following grid

properties may be modified: SWAT, SOIL, SGAS.

8.1. tNavigator kernel 91

 20.1

• Hydraulic fractures (FRACTURE_WELL) may be added in restart models.

• New parameters for WAG cycling are available to set well cycling mode defining in-
jection rate in surface or reservoir conditions (RATE, RESV, SWITCH, SINGLE of the
keyword WWAG).

• The possibility to set type of the initial approximation of pressure in well segments is
available (parameter 6 of the keyword WSEGCNTL).

• The possibility to set total molar rate control or limit for group is implemented (option
TM of the keyword GRUPTARG).

• The possibility to set well control mode as fraction of group rate specified via
GRUPTARG (TGRUP in the 3rd parameter of the keyword WCONHIST).

• The possibility to set economical limits of any type for groups is available (keyword
GECONX).

• The automatic correction of VFP curves in case if the pressure difference at the bottom
and at the wellhead increases as the flow rate decreases (option VFP_NORMALIZE of
the keyword TNAVCTRL).

Integration with other modules:

• Integration with VFP Designer via the keyword IMPORT_VFP.

• Integration with Network Designer via the keyword IMPORT_NDP.

Data input-output:

• The possibility to export SCON in UNRST file is available.

• In the keyword RPTRST the following mnemonics have been added to polymer vis-
cosity model: POLYVM and options SHWVISI, SHWVISJ, SHWVISK for mnemonic
VISC.

8.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator GUI 18.2:

• Multi-touch interface for 2D and 3D is available.

• The support of High DPI displays is improved.

• In the drop-down list of time step selection, each step is marked with a symbol depend-
ing on which calculation results are saved at this step (grid properties, only graphs, or
nothing).

• Palettes and objects’ templates:

8.2. Graphical User Interface 92

 20.1

– The possibility to assign to each object a template and a palette is available.

– Palettes templates are available for grid properties.
• Graphs:
– Visualization of new graphs is available: Molar Production Rate, Molar Production
Rate [WEFAC], Molar Production Rate Target, Molar Production Total, Molar
Production Target Total, Water Production Target Total.
– In Graph Calculator, multiple user graphs may be produced from one script.
– New predefined graph templates are available: Matching, Matching (Oil), Match-
ing (Gas), Matching (Presentation), Total, Total (Presentation).
• Grid Properties:
– The possibility to choose LGRs that are going to be visualized on 2D/3D is avail-
able: show all, active on the current time step, don’t show.
– The possibility to use non-Latin characters and spaces in the names of user grid
properties (User Maps) is available.
– For models with geomechanical option visualization of roof deformation and ele-
ments of stress matrix is available.
– For coal bed methane model visualization of initial coal gas concentration is avail-
able (specified by the keyword GASCONC).

8.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty

In Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 18.2:
• The new type of variable can be used in DEFINES keyword – STRING, External Grid
Search may be used to search through included (in the .data files) file names.
• Visualization of CDF graph is implemented (CDF – cumulative distribution function).
Using this option, for instance, quantiles P10, P50, P90 can be analyzed on a graph for
selected parameters.
• The possibility to utilize user graphs for wells and groups in objective function is avail-
able.
• Visualization of reporting parameters for fluid-in-place regions is available.
• Integration with Geology Designer and Model Designer Module:
– The possibility to create an experiment for Geology Designer tables without build-
ing a complete dynamic model is supported. This allows to perform a complete
uncertainty analysis for geological parameters.
– Discrete cosine transform (DCT) algorithm is implemented in Model Designer to
use the Discrete Fourier transform algorithm for history matching.

8.3. Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty 93

 20.1

8.4. Geology Designer

The following changes occurred in the version 18.2 of Geology Designer:

• Seismic:

– The possibility to open several SEGY files, by selecting it from the seismic tab
are available. 2 options of file opening are supported: Open seismic (without
any additional settings, if the data parameters are automatically detected), Open
Seismic with Customize (the parameters are checked and edited manually).
– The possibility to interpret one horizon on several seismic cubes or 2D lines is
added (there is no need to create a separate horizon for each loaded SEGY file).
– The possibility to display velocities on the loaded seismic 2D or 3D data after the
loading of the corresponding time to depth relation. The time to depth relationship
can be defined and is stored in the seismic object tree available in the Seismic tab.

• Grid construction:

– The possibility to create several grids in the same project is supported. The possi-
bility to create, display and edit additional grids is added.
– The calculation of Fault Lines during the grid construction is added. The fault
lines can be edited and can then be used to rebuild the grid.
– The possibility to compute faults by polygon sets is added.
– The possibility to edit a point set is added.
– In the fault edit menu, the possibility to select several fault sticks (horizontal and
vertical) is added, the multiple selection is supported.

• Interpolation:

– The possibility of setting the input data separately for each zones and regions
is added. 2 new computations are added: Interpolation (zones, regions), Facies
Analysis (zones, regions).
– The tab Data Analysis is added. This tab allows to compute variograms by blocked
wells for the chosen zones and regions and to display the VPC.
– If a discrete template is assigned to the BlockedWells, the variogram and the VPC
are computed for each category. The variogram parameters and the VPC can be
edited.

• Integration with Assisted History Matching and Uncertainty Analysis module:

– The possibility to create an experiment for Geology Designer tables without build-
ing a complete dynamic model is supported. This allows to perform a complete
uncertainty analysis for geological parameters.

8.4. Geology Designer 94

 20.1

– The calculator for logs is available, it includes the possibility to use the defined
terms as variables in workflows.

• Cross-Section tab for cross-section visualization:

– The possibility to create cross-sections in 2D, 3D and on horizons is added (the

presence of a grid in the model is not mandatory). During the cross-section creation
by Points Selection, the option Use Horizons must be used.
– The possibility to visualize logs and faults on cross-sections is added.
– The possibility to build and edit polygons on cross-sections.

• Other options:

– The computation of polygons by horizons and 2D contour lines is added. This

option allows to visualize contour lines of a horizon on a chosen property (i.e. for
example structure contour lines can be superimposed on any 2D map or any 2D
view of any property).
– In the Well Section tab, the possibility to color the gap (difference) between two
displayed curves is available.
– The possibility to work with raster images: loading and visualization. For example,
digitized maps of seismic attributes, facies and other geological maps (object User
Map Images in objects’ tree).
– The possibility to build a contact by horizons or depth, taking the zones and other
discrete properties into account (Calculation Contact. Create Contact by Hori-
zon).
– Accurate computation of volumes and reserves taking the contacts into account
(Calculation Properties. Auxiliary Calculations). If a contact crosses the middle
of a block, the parts situated below and above the contact will be taken into
account.
– The possibility to export project in rescue format is available.

8.5. Model Designer

In Model Designer 18.2:

• Model Cases:

– The possibility to add comments to model cases is available.

– The possibility to add a new case from a particular time step is available.
– Cases are now organized in a tree structure according to their origin.
– The possibility to add arbitrary properties of RUNSPEC section in model case is
available.

8.5. Model Designer 95

 20.1

• Grid properties:

– Visualization of LGR on 2D is implemented.

– Visualization of transmissibilities and flows between blocks in current dynamic
model is available (tab Interblock Flows).
– Dynamic grid properties may be used in Calculator.

• Fluid and Rock properties:

– Several RP curves may be visualized on graphs simultaneously.

– Leverett J-Function option for capillary pressure may be set (JFUNC).
– Directional transmissibility multipliers of rock may be added (ROCKTAB).

• Aquifers:

– The possibility to change aquifers’ properties in workflow is available; also

aquifers’ properties may be used as variables for assisted history matching.
– Assignment of aquifers to the model cases is available in Cases tab.

• Wells Data and Rules:

– The possibility to recalculate production tables to other time dates is available (tab
Wells Data. Tables, option Rebuild table for other time steps).
– The possibility to calculate rates from cumulative values is available (tab Wells
Data. Tables, option Calculate Rate from Cumulative).
– Date Filter in Strategies is implemented and may be used to show data only for
selected dates range.
– A new Rule to set well connection factor multiplier is implemented (WPIMULT).
– In forecast creation dialog parameters to set injected water and vapor composition
are added (WINJTEMP).
– ALQ parameter has been added in the rule to create well controls by table.
– Group production tables are available with the possibility to create group control
rules from them (GCONPROD, GCONINJE).
– New rule Reset Group Target is available (GRUPTARG).
– The possibility to set control from group molar rates is available.
– Filter for rules’ types is implemented (option Use Rule Filter).

• Streamlines visualization for current dynamic model is available.

• Visualization of graphs for connections, fluid-in-place regions and aquifers is available

for current dynamic model.

8.5. Model Designer 96

 20.1

• Pictures and diagrams have been added to the dialogs of hydraulic fracture creation
to illustrate all parameters (Fracture Path, Fracture Plane, Fracture Template, Fracture
Stage, Fracture Arithmetic).

• The possibility to load VFP tables in MO format is available (keyword TUBI).

8.6. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 18.2:

• For compositional variant K-values calculation is available as function of pressure and

temperature (K-values are exported as keywords KVTEMP, KVTABTn).

• For compositional variant new Component Properties are available: specific gravity,
boiling point, specific heat (TBOIL, SPECHA, SPECHB, SPECHG, SPECHH). The
possibility to calculate specific gravity and boiling point via correlations is implemented.

• When exporting a compositional variant, the component properties may be selected for
export independently one by one.

• In Saturation Pressure experiment the calculation of pressure in the lower dew point is
available and the complete boundary of the two-phase area is visualized.

• The calculation of gas hydrates formation is implemented; visualization of the hydrates

curve is available on the Phase Envelope tab.

• For compositional variant selected properties may be recalculated using correlations.

• New parameters can be calculated and visualized on graphs for experiments CCE/CVD:
Liquid Dropout (Psat Vol.) (fraction), Gas Deviation Z factor, Two Phase Z Factor, Oil
Z Factor (EOS), Gas Z Factor (EOS).

• Depth visualization is available in Grading test Y-axis.

• For black-oil variant PVT Calculator is implemented to calculate properties: mass frac-
tion of oil, mass fraction of gas, oil formation volume factor and other.

• For black-oil variant parameters of PVT correlation may be adjusted to match sample
data (Matching Samples option).

• For black-oil variant existing PVT table may be approximated with correlations (Match-
ing PVT Tables option).

8.6. PVT Designer 97

 20.1

8.7. Network Designer

In Network Designer 18.2:

• The integration of Network Designer and Simulator is provided via the keyword IM-
PORT_NETWORK.

• The possibility to create workflows is available.

• The possibility to create multiple visualization tabs is available.

• Temperature option is taken into account in calculation if tables OILVISCT and

WATVISCT are set in PVT Designer project.

• Turner criterion is implemented: calculation of liquid loading velocity ratio for the well.

• Calculation of heat loss through pipe walls is implemented, the following parameters
are taken into account: thermal conductivity of walls, pipe burial depth, method how
pipe burial depth is taken into account.

8.8. VFP Designer

In VFP Designer 18.2:

• The integration of VFP Designer and Simulator is provided via the keyword IM-
PORT_WELL.

• The possibility to create multilateral wells is available (option Branches in Geometry

tab).

• The possibility to load VFP tables in MO format is available (keyword TUBI).

• A new object is available for Well Construction: Gas Lift Valve.

• In the tab Basic data the list of created object’s settings has been extended: name, group
name, object (well or pipe), well type (injector or producer), current VFP, preferred
phase, inflow equation, instructions for automatic shut-in, density type, drainage radius,
crossflow ability and segment model flag.

• The visualization of ALQ axis is available when lifting table is loaded.

• The possibility to take ALQ in account in VFP table calculation (only for black-oil
models).

8.7. Network Designer 98

 20.1

8.9. Compatibility with previous versions

In tNavigator 18.2:

• Results storage for geomechanical calculations (initiated by the keyword GEOMECH)

is optimized.

The new method of results storage for geomechanical calculations is

! not backward compatible. An attempt to view the results calculated in
previous versions will return an error. To view the results, rerun the
calculations in the current version of tNavigator.

8.10. Licenses and license server

In tNavigator 18.2:

• The installation on a system with SELinux enabled is available for the license server.

8.11. Documentation
New training tutorials are added for tNavigator 18.2:

• For Module Simulator:

– HowToCreateFracsViaLGR – Hydraulic fracture modeling via LGR and proper-

ties editing in fracture zone and SRV (Stimulated Rock Volume). Arbitrary fracture
template can be created via polylines. Fracture (or a series of fractures) are tied to
the well trajectory at the specific depth MD. Uniform and logarithmic LGR;
– HowToUseGeomechanics – In tNavigator joint system of coupled equations is
used describing filtration processes in reservoir and geomechanical effects on uni-
fied grid. This tutorial contains the following test models:
∗ ModelGeoMech.data (option GEOMECH FE) – Young’s modulus, Poisson
constant, boundary condition for stress, boundary condition for displacement.
∗ ModelRocktabh.data (ROCKTABH) – modeling of geomechanical effects via
hysteresis rock compaction data tables.
∗ ModelMohrCoulomb.data (COHESION, THETA) – Mohr-Coulomb failure
criterion is used to analysis of wellbore stress state and predict the poten-
tial rock fault. Possible fracture directions.

• For Module Geology Designer:

– HowToUseTemplatesPalette – In this tutorial we give an overview of objects

templates for discrete and continuous properties. Discrete and continuous palette,
ternary palette. Templates import and export;

8.9. Compatibility with previous versions 99

 20.1

– HowToUseFilters – In this tutorial we give an overview of the following filters

to visualize data and analyze properties: Cut, Discrete Property Cut, IJK Filter,
Property Filter, Zone Filter;
– HowToUseIntegratedUncertainty – In this tutorial we perform the integrated un-
certainty study for gas in place using variables of static and dynamic model. Model
is built using workflow as Python script. In static model 3 facies categories are
modeled (fluvial channel, crevasse splay, flood plain) and 5 lithology categories
(sands, silts, tight, shales, coal). Grid is built taking S-shape fault into account.
Variables are: uncertainty in horizon depth, fault transmissibility multiplier, var-
iogramms’ ranges, coefficients in permeability formulae, GWC, minimum water
saturation. P10, P50, P90 for gas in place are calculated. Pareto charts are used to
estimate the correlation between variables and gas in place. Also gas production
for wells can be analyzed;
– HowToUseCoreSamplesImages – In this tutorial we load core samples images
and analyze them on the Well Section together with well logs.

• For Module Model Designer:

– HowToCreateAndCompareCases – In this tutorial we load to Model Designer

existing model in E1 format. To improve the quality of history matching and
modify BHP values we create several cases for this model:
∗ Case 1 – original case
∗ Case 2 – edit relative permeabilities in table form
∗ Case 3 – convert RP to Corey correlation and edit end-points
∗ Case 4 – use new schedule strategy: reset well target BHP
∗ Case 5 – edit 3D permeability property near wells
All cases are saved in cases tree and can be calculated and compared on Graphs in
one window.

• For Module AHM and Uncertainty:

– HowToAnalyzeUncertainty – In this tutorial we make sensitivity test on var-

ious model’s parameters: Permeability values (coefficient in porosity function
formula), Vertical permeability (Kv/Kh), RP in 2 saturation regions (critical wa-
ter saturation and curvature of oil RP), Fault transmissibility, Hydraulic fracture
geometry (azimuth, half-length). Analyze Uncertainty of wells’ performance and
Production Forecast, chosen variables don’t affect the initial FIP. Tables, Graphs,
Histograms, Stacked Plot, Pareto Chart (Pearson correlation) and Quantiles P10-
P50-P90. Model variants corresponding to quantiles.

8.11. Documentation 100

 20.1

9. tNavigator 18.1
The key improvements in 18.1 are:
• For models in E1 and E3 formats, hydraulic fracture model based on grid refinements
and changing rock properties in SRV (Stimulated Rock Volume) zone and fracture
zone is implemented (keywords FRACTURE_PATH, FRACTURE_PLANE, FRAC-
TURE_TEMPLATE, FRACTURE_WELL, FRACTURE_ARITHMETIC,
FRACTURE_STAGE).
• In CPU+GPU calculation NVidia r Volta r video cards are supported.

!
For all video cards (including NVidiar Pascalr and NVidiar Voltar )
user must update device drivers to the latest version with Voltar sup-
port.

• OpenGL version 2.0 is supported.

Compatibility issues may be encountered when using tNavigator together

with software that relies upon older versions of OpenGL.
– Microsoftr Remote Desktopr does not support OpenGL 2.0.
! Please use other software for remote access.
– Oracler VirtualBoxr does not support OpenGL 2.0. Please use
other software for virtualization.

• According to the active development of module Model Designer functionality all pre-
processing options will be moved from simulator graphical interface to Model Designer.
Simulator graphical interface will be used for post-processing results. In 18.1 the fol-
lowing functionality of the tab Fluid Properties has been moved from graphical interface
to Model Designer:
– RP editing with mouse holding Shift button and manual editing of RP table on the
right;
– Introducing of proppant properties table;
– Introducing of flow function.

9.1. tNavigator kernel

The tNavigator kernel 18.1 supports new functionality for the models in E1, E3, IM, ST, and
GE format.
For models in E1 and E3 formats:
• Dynamic toggling of local grid refinements in SCHEDULE via LGRON / LGROFF is
available.

9. tNavigator 18.1 101

 20.1

• The possibility to set rock regions numbers (keyword ROCKNUM) in SCHEDULE

section is available.

• For geomechanical models, permeability multiplier can now be specified as a tabulated

function of stress (PERMSTAB keyword).

For models in E3 format:

• Types of components in standard conditions are supported (keyword CVTYPES).

For models in IM, ST, GE formats:

• Coal bed methane modeling is supported (keywords ADGMAXC, ADGCSTC, COAL-

DIF-COMP, COAL-DIF-TIME).

For models in IM, GE formats:

• Simultaneous specification of CCPOR (rock compressibility by region) and CROCK-

TAB (table of porosity and transmissibility as functions of pressure) for different regions
is supported.

• The possibility to specify initial water saturation at given gravity capillary equilibrium
(VERTICAL DEPTH_AVE) using SWINIT keyword.

• SWNEQ keyword for initial fluid distribution is supported.

• For IM models, SONEQ keyword is supported.

• Pseudopressure option is available (keyword PSEUDOP).

• The possibility to set relative permeabilities scaling for wells’ connections to calculate
phase mobility (keyword KRPERF).

Special options:

• For models in E1 and E3 formats, hydraulic fracture model based on grid refinements
and changing rock properties in SRV (Stimulated Rock Volume) zone and fracture
zone is implemented (keywords FRACTURE_PATH, FRACTURE_PLANE, FRAC-
TURE_TEMPLATE, FRACTURE_WELL, FRACTURE_ARITHMETIC,
FRACTURE_STAGE).

• For models in E1 and E3 formats, keywords related to finite elements method in geome-
chanical modeling are supported: ROCKAXES, COHESION, THETA.

• For models in E1 and E3 formats the possibility to turn off hysteresis is available (option
NONE parameter 5 of the keyword EHYSTR, option NONE parameter 4 of the keyword
EHYSTRR).

• tNavigator TNAVCTRL settings:

9.1. tNavigator kernel 102

 20.1

– Faster and more efficient vectorized code for compositional flash and phase prop-
erties calculation is turned on by default (TNAVCTRL VEC_FLASH YES).
– GPU calculation of vectorized compositional flash is supported (TNAVCTRL
GPU_FLASH).

• NVIDIA Volta video cards are now supported for GPU calculations.

! For all video cards (including NVidiar Pascalr and NVidiar Voltar ) user
must update device drivers to the latest version with Voltar support.

9.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator GUI 18.1:

• According to the active development of module Model Designer functionality all pre-
processing options will be moved from simulator graphical interface to Model Designer.
Simulator graphical interface will be used for post-processing results. In 18.1 the fol-
lowing functionality of the tab Fluid Properties has been moved from graphical interface
to Model Designer:

– RP editing with mouse holding Shift button and manual editing of RP table on the
right;
– Introducing of proppant properties table;
– Introducing of flow function.

its format (E1, E3, MO, IM, ST, GE) does not have to be specified.

• In the Graph Calculator:

– Usage of external Python libraries is supported (compatible with Python version

3.6.4 or higher).
– Usage of UDQ is supported.
– Function of aggregation over time intervals is introduced
(aggregate_by_time_interval).

• In Bubble Maps:

– Legend display is added.

– Option of viewing bubble maps without viewing the wells is added.

• In the graphs:

– Option of exporting multiple screenshots by wells is added in Graph templates.

To unload multiple graphs with the same parameters on multiple wells, create a
Well Filter and then enable it when saving the screenshot in Graph templates.

9.2. Graphical User Interface 103

 20.1

– Option of User Selection of graphs is added (check multiple graphs, right-click

and select Add All Checked to User Selection.)

• In Remote GUI, integration with Windows HPC is supported.

9.3. Assisted History Matching

In the Assisted History Matching 18.1:

• Automatic weight assignment based on historic data is introduced in objective function

specification.

• Filter by groups of variants is added.

• Display of calculated UDQ’s for model variants is added.

• Calculation of objective function by user graphs is redesigned. If possible, a historic

value is automatically calculated and is taken into account in the objective function.

9.4. Geology Designer

The following changes occurred in the version 18.1 of Geology Designer:

• Seismic:

– Display of wells, markers, and logs on the 2D seismic lines and arbitrary seismic
lines.
– Interpretation of arbitrary seismic lines.
– Calculation for transforming a seismic fault into fault in depth.
– Window of seismic filter for 3D, 2D, arbitrary lines. Customizable range and ge-
ometry.
– Visualization of seismic lines intersection.

• Interpolation:

– Azimuth map calculation is available.

– Variograms for Blocked Wells are available (for discrete Blocked Wells, per fa-
cies).

• Grid creation:

– Possibility to edit faults is available.

• Import:

– Loading of Shape files is available (polygons, point sets).

9.3. Assisted History Matching 104

 20.1

• New object Contact is introduced.

– Creating a contact by horizon or by depth is available (without zone separation,

etc).
– Contacts WOC-GOC are taken into account in Calculate Volumetric Properties
(volumes and fluid-in-place).

• New object Core Sample Images is introduced. It can be loaded and displayed on Well
Section.

• Other visualization options:

– In 3D, a filter by values of discrete property is introduced.

– Crosshair pointer on Well Section is added.
– Editing of comment logs on Well Section is introduced.

9.5. Model Designer

In Model Designer 18.1:
• Enhancements in the Fluid properties tab that specifies the properties of fluids, rock,
proppants:

– The possibility to convert table RP to Corey / LET correlations is available.

– The possibility to load tables of capillary pressures from other tables when speci-
fying RP.
– The possibility to load laboratory data on phase permeabilities and match the model
parameters against them by varying the end points and curvature parameters.
– Different keywords for PROPS and SOLUTION sections can now be specified in
graphical interface in keyword form.
– Creation and editing of proppant properties and flow function (exported as FLOW-
FUNC and PROPPANT) is introduced.

• Working with well data:

– In Well rules, the possibility to specify multiple development strategies for a model
is available. Each strategy may contain Global rules and rules by time steps of its
own. When assembling a model (Definitions → Schedule), any strategy can be
attached.

• Working with grid properties:

– Interface for grid properties is reorganized. All grid properties are initially created
in a common project tree Properties. Then a model is assembled, and a grid
property is assigned for each particular property needed for the dynamic model.

9.5. Model Designer 105

 20.1

– Grid properties that are assigned for usage in the dynamic model are highlighted
with bold in the Properties tree.

• The possibility to control the amount of RAM used for quick access to project data
(Settings → Options → Designer in the main window of tNavigator).

• Ternary palette is added as an option to Object Settings.

9.6. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 18.1:

• Splitting of heavy fraction into components is introduced. Whitson and Pedersen corre-
lations are implemented.

• The possibility to specify black oil phases viscosity as temperature dependent (keywords
WATVISCT, OILVISCT, VISCREF).

• The possibility to export depth-dependent temperature (keyword TEMPVD) from Grad-

ing test.

• Temperature is considered for calculating water properties.

• Quality Check for mixing of compositional variants is introduced.

• The possibility to specify component concentrations in mass percent.

• New library components are added (ethanol C2 H5 OH, propylene glycol C3 H8 O2 , di-
ethylene glycol C4 H10 O3 , triethylene glycol C6 H14 O4 ).

• Parachors are now calculated for library and user components, and can be exported
(keyword PARACHOR).

9.7. Network Designer

In Network Designer 18.1:

• Project Management is introduced. The following workflows are supported:

– PVT → Network Designer allows the usage of a previously created PVT De-
signer project in Network Designer.
– PVT → VFP allows the usage of a previously created PVT Designer projects in
VFP Designer projects, with the option of mass editing of the PVT tables used in
VFP.
– VFP → Objects allows the usage of a previously created VFP Designer projects
for objects (wells, pipes, etc.) with the option of mass editing of the used VFP
tables.

9.6. PVT Designer 106

 20.1

• Object filter is added.

• Legend for sector diagrams is added.

• Heat loss in the pipe is taken into account.

9.8. VFP Designer

In VFP Designer 18.1:
• Project Management is introduced. It is now possible to use the previously created PVT
Designer project in VFP Designer, in particular, when opened from Network Designer.

• Interface for creation of pipes and casings is redesigned.

• New IPR models are added: Jones, Fetkovich, Back pressure, Vogel.

• Import of VFP projects into simulator is enabled (keyword IMPORT_VFP, model format
E1).

9.9. Licenses and license server

In tNavigator 18.1:
• The possibility to install the file license and file for USB key directly from a *.zip
archive.

• New versions of license server (18.1) can now run on active license with expired support
(with tNavigator versions 17.4 and earlier).

• Limitation of 300 000 blocks for academic licenses is introduced.

9.10. Documentation
New training tutorials are added for tNavigator 18.1:
• For Module Simulator:

– 3.1 How To Use WELLTRACK+COMPDATMD.

• For Module Geology Designer:

– 9.3 How To Create Grid With Y-Faults;

– 9.5 How To Upscale Log Data;
– 9.6 How To Do Facies Modeling;
– 9.7 How To Do Porosity Modeling;
– 9.9 How To Start With Seismic;

9.8. VFP Designer 107

 20.1

– 9.10 How To Interpret Horizons On Seismic;

– 9.11 How To Do The Time To Depth Conversion;
– 9.12 How To Do Volume Estimation.

• For Module PVT Designer:

– 11.2 How To Use Blackoil Variants;

– 11.3 How To Create Condensate Model.

9.10. Documentation 108

 20.1

10. tNavigator 17.4

The key improvements in 17.4 are:
• The geomechanical modeling is supported. The solution of the elasticity problem by
finite elements method is fully coupled with the calculation of filtration problem.
• In Model Designer, the first implementation of Model Composer is available to manage
multiple variants of dynamic model (realizations). For each variant grid properties, PVT,
RP and other properties can be selected independently.
• In Geology Designer, the geological reserve estimation is available (without dynamic
model initialization).
• In Geology Designer, tables generation for fluid-in-place and source data is available.
• In Model Designer, dual porosity models can be built in Model Composer.

10.1. tNavigator kernel

The tNavigator kernel 17.4 supports new functionality for the models in E1, E3, MO, IM, ST,
and GE format.

GPU calculations:
• GPU calculation of phase properties and their derivatives is supported for isothermal
compositional models.
For models in E1 and E3 format:
• The geomechanical modeling is available. The solution of the elasticity problem by finite
elements method is fully coupled with the calculation of filtration problem. Young mod-
ulus, Poisson coefficient, boundary conditions can be specified (keywords GEOMECH,
GMDISBC, GMPSTBC, YOUNGMOD, POISSONR). The following grid properties
are visualized: displacements, stress tensor, porosity.
• The possibility to use the hysteresis model of rock compaction (keyword ROCKTABH)
is available.
• The possibility to set the name of the well group or a satellite group for the source or
sink nodes is available (parameter 6 of the keyword NODEPROP).
• The possibility to use residual resistance factors for polymer flood model is available
(keyword PLYKRRF).
For models in E1 format:
• The possibility to set water viscosity as a function of concentrations of polymers and
salts, and also of temperature is available (keyword PLYVSCST).

10. tNavigator 17.4 109

 20.1

• For the models with TEMP option, rock heat conductivity can be specified with the
keywords THCOIL, THCGAS, THCWATER, THCROCK, THCONSF.

• For the models with gas containing vaporized oil (keyword VAPOIL), non-equilibrium
phase transitions are supported (keyword VAPPARS).

• Options that decide the application of group control operations are supported (second
record of the keyword PRORDER).

• The possibility to use well segments representing pullthrough pumps is available (key-
word WSEGPULL).

• The possibility to use well segments representing down-hole separators is available

(keyword WSEGSEP).

For models in E3 format:

• For the models with solid phase, the possibility to simulate the lowering of phase
mobility as a result of adsorption of solid phase on the rock is available (keywords
SOLIDMMS, SOLIDMMC, SOLIDADS).

• For thermal models, the following keywords related to oil density calculations are sup-
ported: CCTYPE, CCTYPES, PREFS, DREFS, TREFS.

• For thermal models, the new options of chemical reactions modeling are available (key-
words EQLDREAC, EQLDKVCR).

• The possibility to check the VFP tables (VFPPROD and VFPINJ) correctness against
the specified PVT properties is available (keyword VFPCHECK).

For models in IM, ST, GE format:

• The possibility to specify and use templates for hydraulic fractures (keywords PLNR-
FRAC_TEMPLATE, PLNRFRAC).

• The possibility to change the grid block parameters (volume and face area) is available
(keywords VAMOD, VATYPE).

• GASZONE OIL can now be specified for the calculation of initial fluid distribution.

• LINEAR_ISOPERM model is available (LININTERP for ST format) to calculate oil

relative permeability.

• For models in IM format, OILWATER model type is supported.

• For models in ST format, the parameters controlling pressure loss and heat exchange in
the wellbore can be specified (keyword PHWELLBORE).

Data input/output:

10.1. tNavigator kernel 110

 20.1

• RPTRST keyword now supports the options WMF, XMF, YMF controlling the export
of grid properties of the initial component composition of oil, water and gas to binary
files.

• SUMMARY section now supports the option DATE for the formatting of .RSM file.
Special options:
• The possibility to set THP well control mode for the wells working in history matching
mode is available. For producers, this corresponds to the THP option in the 3rd parame-
ter of the keyword WCONHIST, for injectors it is the THP option in the 12th parameter
of the keyword WCONINJH.

• Flow speed limitations at bottom hole are supported (keyword WELTARG, op-
tions FLOWWH, FLOWOH, FLOWLH, FLOWGH, FLOWVH, FLOWW, FLOWO,
FLOWL, FLOWG, FLOWV).

• The possibility to set temperature in the wellbore is available (TEMPERATURE option

of the keyword WELLDATA).

• The following calculation control options are available (keyword TNAVCTRL):

– Option controlling the D-factor calculation for multilateral wells (DFAC-

TORSCALING).
– Option that enhances numeric stability of calculations in models contain-
ing wells with very high rate, producers and injectors alike (parameter
TEST_WELL_FOR_MAX_RATE). When enabled, it limits the maximum rate
with the estimated maximum rate of fluid flow to/from neighboring blocks consid-
ering the given BHP.

10.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator GUI 17.4:
• The capabilities of Graph Calculator on the Graph Templates tab are enhanced. The
following options are introduced:

– Cycling through models, time steps, and objects (groups, wells, perforations).
– Vector function if_then_else (operates on graphs).
– Tables linearly interpolating the given values vs time (i.e. function cre-
ate_table_vs_time). May be used, in particular, to estimate oil prices.
– Functions to translate cumulative rates to average rates per step and vice versa
(diff, diff_t, cum_sum, cum_sum_t).

• The possibility to use User Cut (filter by blocks) when exporting 3D properties in xyz
format is available.

10.2. Graphical User Interface 111

 20.1

• New type of cross-sections by vertical wells is implemented. It is specified by radius

and azimuth angle with respect to the well.

• The possibility to set the composition of the injected water and steam is availble for
thermal models in the well edit dialog (keyword WINJTEMP will be exported to the
user file).

• The possibility to set the fixed scale for printing is available.

10.3. Assisted History Matching

In the Assisted History Matching 17.4:
• Triangular distribution for Latin hypercube is available.

• Extended variants of Plackett-Burman experiment are available: Standard, Folded

(symmetric), and Including the line with minimal values.

• On the Stacked plot, the absolute values mode is added. This way, the Mismatch mode
lets the user estimate the contribution of wells to the objective function, while Absolute
mode allows the selection of high-rate producers for the adjustment of weights in the
objective function.

• Table with values is added to the Stacked plot.

10.4. Geology Designer

The following changes occurred in the version 17.4 of Geology Designer:
• Volumetric properties and fluid-in-place computation is available (HCPV, STOIIP, GIIP,
etc).

• Report generation and export in table format is now available for fluid-in-place and
source data, with an indication of the layer, the fluid-in-place type, the zone, the geo-
metric volume of fluid-in-place, etc.

• Algorithms of grid construction are extended and optimized. The following options are
available:

– Algorithms: Create Grid by Horizons and Create Grid by Point Sets and Faults.
– Grid construction in CORNERS format.
– Use of arbitrary surfaces as structural faults.
– Management of non structural faults (in particular Y-fault models).
– Different types of horizons and point sets can be defined, which allows to manage
horizon contacts. The following types are available: Conformable, Discontinuous,
Erosional and Basement.

10.3. Assisted History Matching 112

 20.1

• The following options are now available to work with seismic data:

– Visualization of several seismic cubes and 2D lines in 3D.

– Data visualization along polylines for several seismic cubes at the same time.
– 2D visualization of seismic data flattening along a seismic horizon.
– Use of cash memory for SEGY cubes in order to accelarate the working process.
– Interpretation of seismic faults on seismic profiles.

• The following options are now available to work with well log data:

– Log curves editing: remove equals (repeated values), remove spikes, resample logs
(modify the discretization step), change the type of the curve for continuous curves.
– Facies names are displayed on the Well Section tab.
– Visualize well logs on 2D for wells (Log Signature).

• The following options are now available for interpolation computation:

– In order to prepare the well data to the property modeling by upscaling the well
logs to the grid, Blocked Wells computation is added. 9 blocking methods are
available.
– Computed Blocked Wells can be visualized in 3D, on the well section tab and as
a histogram.
– Compute a variogram per facies and select it for the modeling.
– Setting of the facies proportion (defined as fractions) for each facies corresponding
to the output facies. The fractions can be numerically defined or can be taken from
the trend, the well logs or the blocked data.
– New algorithms for discrete interpolation (Facies Analysis) are added: 3D Kriging
and 3D SGS.

• A new tab Cross Section is available. It allows to visualize user-defined cross-section

and gathers the following options:

– Properties and well trajectories visualization.

– Construction of cross-sections using wells, polygons and grids.

10.5. Model Designer

In Model Designer 17.4:

• The first implementation of Model Composer is available to manage multiple variants

of dynamic model (realizations). The following options are available:

– Manage different dynamic models realizations.

10.5. Model Designer 113

 20.1

– Selection of petrophysical, relative permeabilities, and PVT properties for each

variant.
– Easy model editing and copying.
– The possibility to build dual porosity models.
• The following options are now available in Well Rules tab:
– Implementation of the rule which allows to add a comment in the beginning of a
time step.
– Implementation of the rule which allows the gas-lift optimization (the keywords
LIFTOPT and WLIFTOPT are added to the schedule).
– Display only the time steps for which the rules are defined.
– Creation of tables with limits and history during the import of models in Model
Designer.
– Implementation of the option Check the Rules to check the coherence of the rules,
to find contradictory inputs and lack of data. The detailed information is displayed
on the log panel.
• The following options are now available in Fluid and rock properties tab:
– A totally new design for the Fluid Properties tab is implemented.
– Definition of parameters for salt, polymers, surfactants (ASP), and temperature
modeling.
– Improved menu for the mapping of the properties to the regions.

10.6. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 17.4:
• For compositional models, there is now an option to specify multiple compositions
within one variant, and to run simultaneous matching of multiple experiments against
different compositions.
• Variants with different components can now be blended. If some components are de-
clared as having different properties in original variants, their resulting properties are
adjusted so as to reproduce the phase properties of original variants as close as possible.
• Grading test can now export keywords that specify the content of dissolved gas in oil
or vaporized oil in gas as a function of depth (RSVD/RVVD).
• After a pseudocomponent is created, it is possible to run Grading test to specify the
contents of the initial components before lumping (keyword DETAILMF).
• The possibility to import depth-dependent composition (keywords ZMFVD/COMPVD)
is available.
• Water salinity can now be considered when generating PVT tables for black oil variants.

10.6. PVT Designer 114

 20.1

10.7. Network Designer

In Network Designer 17.4:

• Printing of the boundary conditions to the log file before the calculation is added.

• Second equation system to calculate flows in the surface network is added.

• Representation of surface network calculation results in GUI after model reload is added.

• Visualization of calculation results along the well is added.

10.8. VFP Designer

In VFP Designer 17.4:

• New objects are available: Bottom Hole, Open Hole, Filter.

• 3D well geometry can now be visualized with coloring according to correlation type or
DLS.

• Well logs can now be loaded and visualized in 3D.

• Correlations for IPR are added (Vogel (for liquids only), Fetkovitch (for liquids only),
Well-PI, Well test Data).

• Events on given dates can now be specified.

• VFPPROD tables checking is introduced. THP is assumed to be 1010 if:

– properties of unspecified phase are referred to;

– phase properties are physically unrealistic;
– pressure calculation fails to converge for any other reason.

10.9. Licenses and license server

In tNavigator 17.4:

• The combination of several sets of licenses on one USB key (for standalone and network
licenses) is supported.

10.7. Network Designer 115

 20.1

10.10. Documentation
New documents are added in tNavigator 17.4:

• VFP Designer Guide.

New training tutorials are added for tNavigator v.17.4:

• Modules Geology Designer, Model Designer, Assisted History Matching:

– How To Use Integrated Workflow AHM (Workflow and integrated assisted history
matching).

• Model Designer module:

– How To Add Aquifer All Possibilities (All practical ways to create an aquifer).
– How To Build Big Model Use Well Rules (Creating a model with numerous wells,
setting well rules).

• VFP Designer module:

– How to use VFP Designer (Using VFP Designer).

10.10. Documentation 116

 20.1

11. tNavigator 17.3

The key improvements in 17.3 are:

• New module VFP Designer is available. It is intended to model well geometry and con-
struction, load the pressure drop measurements, create lifting tables from correlations,
and adjust them with the measurements.

11.1. tNavigator kernel

In tNavigator 17.3 kernel new options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
MO, IM, ST, GE.

For models in E1 and E3 format:

• The possibility to define chord segment links required to occur looped flow paths in
multisegment wells is available (keyword WSEGLINK).

• The possibility to define well segment as influx control device ICD is available (key-
word WSEGSICD).

• The possibility to specify diffusion coefficients for block faces is available (keywords
DIFFX, DIFFY, DIFFZ).

• The possibility to specify multipliers for diffusion coefficients is available (keywords

DIFFMX, DIFFMY, DIFFMZ, DIFFMX-, DIFFMY-, DIFFMZ).

• The possibility to specify diffusion coefficients for non-neighbor connections is avail-

able (keywords NNC, NNCGEN).

• The possibility to scale the pressure used for calculation of the adsorption capacity in
the block when modeling the coal bed methane is available (keyword LANGMPL).

• The possibility to specify the artificial lift quantity via UDQ is available (4th parameter
of the keyword BRANPROP) and fixed pressure for the terminal node (2nd parameter
of the keyword NODEPROP) for extended network model.

• The possibility to modify the location of relative permeability scanning curve for the
wetting phase is available in order to decrease the deviation of scanning curve from the
region bounded by the drainage and imbibition curves (parameter 13 of the keyword
EHYSTR).

• The possibility to remove gas from a node of the extended network is available (keyword
NGASREM).

For models in E3 format:

11. tNavigator 17.3 117

 20.1

• Reinjection options can be set via parameters 12-15 and 17-19 of the keyword
WELLINJE.

• The possibility to define the composition of the oil or gas injected or produced by a
satellite group is available (parameters 1-3 of the keyword GSATCOMP).

• For compositional models, support of tracing of the detailed composition in pseu-

docomponents produced by lumping is available (keywords LUMPING, DETAILVD,
DETAILMF).

• For thermal models, support of the options CGVTYPE/COVTYPE for density calcula-
tions of oil and gas is available.

For models in MO format:

• The possibility to define viscosity dependence upon pressure gradient is available (key-
word OVPG).

In MPI version:

• Keyword ARITHMETIC now supports the usage of grids with properties from previous
sections.

• Keyword ARITHMETIC now supports the operations BLOCK, CYLINDER, X, Y, Z.

Special options:

• The following options of calculation control TNAVCTRL can be used:

– COARSEN_BLOCK_DATA_LOGIC defines coarsening of the grid. Possible val-

ues: CENTRAL or NEAREST_ACTIVE_TO_CENTRAL. In the latter case, the
nearest active block (according to I,J,K coordinates) to the inactive central block
is selected as its representative.

• Keyword ARITHMETIC now supports the CYLINDER option, which creates a grid
with value 1 assigned to the blocks inside the specified cylinder.

• The possibility to remove oil from a node of the extended network is available (keyword
NOILREM).

• The possibility to define viscosity dependence upon pressure gradient is available (key-
word OVPG).

11.1. tNavigator kernel 118

 20.1

11.2. Graphical User Interface

In Graphical User Interface 17.3:

• Visualization of the rock compaction transmissibility multipliers (specified by ROCK-

TAB) at current time step. The property is available at Grid Properties → Calcu-
lated → Rock compaction Trans. Mult.

• Visualization of the Transmissibility multipliers along X, Y, Z, X-, Y-, Z-. The properties
are available at:

– Grid Properties → Initial → Trans. Mult. along X (also Y, Z, X-, Y-, Z-). This
property is the product of the transmissibility multiplier along X (MULTX), ad-
ditional transmissibility multiplier along X (HMMULTX, HMMLTXY), and fault
transmissibility multiplier along X (MULTFLT).
– Grid Properties → Calculated → Trans. Mult. along X (also Y, Z, X-, Y-, Z-).
This property is the product of the transmissibility multiplier along X (MULTX)
and fault transmissibility multiplier along X (MULTFLT) from the start till the
current time step.

• The dialog Load well data now contains the following options:

– Replace missing values with zero. If this option is used, the parameters for the
well that are missing in the file on the specific date will be replaced with zeros.
– Assign zero values to model dates missing in historical data. If selected, the
values for missing dates will be replaced with zeros. Otherwise the values from
the previous time step are used.

11.3. Remote GUI

In the remote graphical user interface 17.3:

• Queues Filter is available.

11.4. Assisted History Matching

In Assisted History Matching 17.3:

• The possibility to create user’s custom vectors (vector calculator) is available.

• The possibility to use the user’s vectors as objective function is available (the graph
must be named objf).

• The possibility to create forecast variants with user’s SCHEDULE section is available.
Variables can be set in user SCHEDULE.

11.2. Graphical User Interface 119

 20.1

11.5. Geology Designer

In Geology Designer 17.3:

• Editing of 2D surfaces using contour lines (available for horizons and 2D Maps).

• Grid building:

– The possibility to specify the parameters of logarithmic local grid refinement

(LGR).

• Working with seismic data:

– 3D editor of seismic horizons on the 3D tab.

– Display of wells, well logs and markers on the Seismic tab (2D).
– The possibility to create a synthetic velocity curve, synthetic acoustic impedance,
reflection coefficient and interval velocity curves to compare it with the seismic
data.

• Option of filtering the trajectories by depth in 3D (option Cut Trajectory by Depth).

• Third coordinate for polygons can be used (Z).

• The possibility to use Ghost curve on the Well Section is available to compare the form
of log of one well with its form on other wells when correlation is performed.

• Check for simultaneous opening of a project by multiple users (.lock file).

11.6. Model Designer

In Model Designer 17.3:

• Date Filter for importing and exporting of events and history is available.

• Choice of measurement units in the export dialog of events and history is available.

• The possibility to specify main control mode for wells in the Rules.

• The possibility to use Filter by wells in the tables of events and history is available.

• The possibility to use the Well Filter in the Well Table is available.

• The possibility to select fonts for contour lines marks is available.

• Visualization of legend for crossplots is available.

• Check for simultaneous opening of a project by multiple users (.lock file).

11.5. Geology Designer 120

 20.1

11.7. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 17.3:
• Creation of PVT tables by correlations for black oil variants is available.

• Comparison of the graphs of most important properties before and after matching, and
also before and after lumping.

• Binary interaction coefficients of components can now be used as variables for match-
ing.

• Export of multiple variants as multiple EOS/PVT regions is available.

• Export of pseudocomponent’s composition (keyword LUMPING) is available.

• The number of compounds in the component library has been extended.

11.8. Network Designer

In Network Designer 17.3:
• Integration with VFP Designer.

• New types of network objects can be used:

– 2-phase separators;
– 3-phase separators.

• The possibility to load existing VFP tables or create them in VFP Designer for pipes,
wells, compressors, pumps, chokes.

• The possibility of simultaneous editing of multiple objects is available.

• Undo/redo functionality is available.

• The possibility to turn objects off at different steps is available.

11.9. VFP Designer

In tNavigator 17.3 the first implementation of VFP Designer is available:
• Integration with PVT Designer, Network Designer is provided.

• Well geometry specification:

– Loading of well trajectory in standard formats (Well Path/Deviation, LAS, GWTD,

etc.);
– Copypasting of trajectory points from a text file or a spreadsheet;

11.7. PVT Designer 121

 20.1

– Manual editing of a trajectory;

– Well geometry visualization (TVD and Deviation Survey).
• Well construction specification:
– Casing, tubing, perforation, squeeze, packer;
– Visualization of construction along well trajectory;
– Manual drag-and-drop addition and editing of properties of well construction ob-
jects;
– Creation and import of custom object catalogs;
– Selection of parameters of well construction objects as variables for matching
experimental data (pressure drop measurements).
• Fluid composition specification:
– Loading of properties or usage of PVT Designer to specify black oil or composi-
tional properties.
• Entering the experimental data (pressure drop measurements).
• Creation of lifting tables (VFP):
– Creation of tables by correlations (Beggs-Brill, Hagedorn-Brown, Orkiszewwski,
Gray, etc.);
– Usage of different correlations for vertical, deviated and horizontal parts of the
wellbore;
– Setting of Friction multiplier and Hydrostatic component of the correlation;
– Specification of points to calculate correlations in the table form;
– Visualization of the experimental measurement along with the created VFP tables;
– Normalization of VFP tables;
– Matching of tables by selected measured parameters and variables (construction
elements’ settings, Friction and Hydrostatic components);
– Application of the construction elements’ settings found by matching;
– Export of VFP tables to a file or to Network Designer.

11.10. Licenses and license server

In tNavigator v.17.3:
• Licensing of VFP Designer.
This module is included in Geology Designer, Model Designer, and Network Designer.
When starting the VFP Designer from these modules, a separate license is not required.
When starting the VFP Designer as a standalone program, it searches for available
license in this order: Model Designer, Network Designer, Geology Designer.

11.10. Licenses and license server 122

 20.1

11.11. Documentation
New documents are added in tNavigator 17.3:

• Network Designer Guide;

• PVT Designer Guide.

New training tutorials are added in tNavigator v.17.3:

• Module Geology Designer:

– 9-0_HowToGetStartedGeologyDesigner (Introduction to Geology Designer). This

tutorial shows the process how to create Geology Designer project. Working with
Settings, Calculations and Visualization panel. Set coordinate reference system.
Directions of coordinate axes. Floating tabs. Visualization settings.

• Module Network Designer:

– 12-1_HowToUseNetworkDesigner. This tutorial shows how to build surface net-

work from wells to sinks. Different surface equipment is used: pipes, links, chokes,
pumps, compressors, separators. Integration with PVT Designer and VFP Designer.
PVT Designer is used to set fluid properties. VFP Designer is used to set well con-
struction, geometry and create VFP tables for wells via correlations.

11.11. Documentation 123

 20.1

12. tNavigator 17.2

The key improvements in 17.2 are:

• The first implementation of module Network Designer is available. Production and

injection networks can be created in graphical interface and calculated.

• Tools for seismic interpretation are available in Geology Designer: Manual interpreta-
tion, Guided Autotracking, Seeded 2D autotracking, Seeded 3D autotracking, time to
depth conversion.

• Assisted History Matching module is integrated with Model Designer and Geology
Designer. Variables can be added to the workflow.

• The first implementation of Geosteering is available in module Geology Designer, that

allows to display horizontally logs of planned and drilled well, 2D visualization and
calculate synthetic log using reference well.

12.1. tNavigator kernel

In tNavigator 17.2 kernel new options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
MO, IM, ST, GE.

CPU+GPU calculation:

• Calculation of compositional models via CPU+GPU is available. The only GPUs starting
from Pascal architecture are supported (and latest CUDA drivers).

For models in E1 and E3 format:

• The possibility to open wells closed due to priorities is available (option POPN in the
2nd parameter of the keyword WELOPEN).

• The possibility to assign for well drilling unit number is available, so that all wells
with the same unit number are drilled simultaneously (3rd parameter of the keyword
WDRILPRI).

• The possibility to use water molar fraction in VFP tables is available (option WTF in
the 4th parameter of the 1st line of the keyword VFPPROD).

• The possibility to set guide rate at the beginning of each time step equal to the value
of group’s production rate in reservoir conditions is available (option VOID in the 10th
parameter of the keyword GCONINJE).

• The possibility to inject several passive tracers in one well is available (injection is set
via the keyword WTRACER).

12. tNavigator 17.2 124

 20.1

• For dual porosity models multiplier for matrix-fracture transmissibility can be set as one
value for all grid (keyword MULTSIG) or for each grid block (keyword MULTSIGV).

For models in E1 format:

• Option SHRATE is available for a polymer shear thinning/thickening in logarithmic

form.

• Option MISCIBLE is available (keywords PMISC, MSFN, SDENSITY, SGCWMIS,

SORWMIS, TLMIXPAR).

For models in E3 format:

• The possibility to set oil injection rate and gas injection rate limits (options HCOIL,
HCGAS in the 2nd parameter of the keyword WCONINJE).

• For thermal models in E3 format options CGDTYPE/CODTYPE are available to calcu-

late gas/oil phase densities.

For models in IM format:

• The possibility to use quadratic inflow relationship for gas inflow/outflow from a well
is available (option QUAD of the keyword PERF).

For models in GE format:

• Correlations can be used to set component properties (keywords PVC3, CRIT).

For models in MO format:

• For compositional models CO2 solution in water can be taken into account (keywords
SOLU, RHAQ).

• The possibility to inject several passive tracers in one well is available (injection is set
via the keyword TRAC).

Data input-output. Reports:

• The following parameters can be requested in SUMMARY:

– Water component molar injection rate (FWMIR, GWMIR, WWMIR);

– Water component molar injection total (FWMIT, GWMIT, WWMIT);
– Water component molar production rate (FWMPR, GWMPR, WWMPR);
– Water component molar production total (FWMPT, GWMPT, WWMPT);
– Component Hydrocarbon as Moles (FCMIP).

• Well control mode (WMCTL) can be requested while exporting UNRST/UNSMRY

binaries and RSM file from graphical interface.

12.1. tNavigator kernel 125

 20.1

• Well Filter can be used to export UNRST/UNSMRY binaries and RSM file from graph-
ical interface.

• The possibility to save reporting parameters for wells (groups) on calculation time steps
in UNRST/UNSMRY binaries export is available in console calculation (keywords RP-
TONLY and RPTONLYO can be used in sections SUMMARY and SCHEDULE).

Special options:

• The following options to set tNavigator calculation are available in TNAVCTRL:

– AQUCON_LGR – allows to build links for numerical aquifer-grid when local grid
refinement LGR is used in the area of aquifer connection.
– USEGASLIFTFROMSHUTWELLS – allows to include or ignore the value of
gas-lift for shut wells in network.
– RECOMPUTEGPMAINT – sets the logic of cumulative pressure error recalcu-
lation (integral of pressure error) when the wells are not on GPMAINT control
(keywords GPMAINT, GPMAINT3).
– WELLPRESTOL – sets tolerance, used to calculate bottom hole pressure for the
well which is not on bottom hole pressure control.

• For models in E1 format the possibility to use quadratic inflow relationship for gas
inflow/outflow from a well is available (option QUAD in the 8th parameter of the
keyword WELSPECS).

• User defined quantities (UDQ) can be used in gas-lift optimization options (3rd param-
eter of the keyword WLIFTOPT; parameters 2,3 of the keyword GLIFTOPT).

• The possibility to set THP limit for wells working in history matching mode (option
THPTARG of the keyword WELTARG).

12.2. Graphical User Interface

In Graphical User Interface 17.2:

• Create a screenshot option has been updated for 2D, 3D visualization, graphs. A screen-
shot can be saved in vector or raster format, copied to clipboard or printed.

12.3. Geology Designer

In Geology Designer 17.2:

• Floating tabs are available (2D, 3D, Histogram, Seismic, Wells Table, Well Section,
VPC, Crossplot, Geosteering) with the possibility to place them in separate windows or
next to each other through splitters.

12.2. Graphical User Interface 126

 20.1

• Multiple tabs with individual settings for each one can be created. For example, several
2D views with different settings can be created via menu View. Windows.

• Create a screenshot option has been updated for 2D, 3D visualization, graphs. A screen-
shot can be saved in vector or raster format, copied to clipboard or printed.

• Workflow:

– The possibility to create workflow automatically according to user’s actions is

available (Document. Record actions to user workflow).
– The possibility to uncheck temporary selected actions in workflow is available.
– The possibility to check consistency of the workflow before running it (button Test
in Workflow dialogue).
– Integration with Assisted History Matching module is available: variables can be
added to the workflow. Variables can be used in the following calculations: Horizon
Calculator, Property Calculator, Adjust Variogram parameters, Property Interpola-
tion, Create RP Tables, Create Equil tables.

• Work with seismic data:

– Tools for seismic horizons interpretation are available on Seismic tab. Manual
interpretation, Guided Autotracking, Seeded 2D autotracking, Seeded 3D auto-
tracking. Interpreted horizon is visualized in time axis (time in milliseconds).
– 3D Correlation is available to create seismic 3D horizon according to picking.
– Time-depth law can be loaded as a Log for wells.
– The possibility to create horizon via seismic horizon and time-depth law is avail-
able (Create Horizon by Seismic Horizon in Auxiliary Calculations).

• Well correlation (Well Section tab):

– The possibility to Show Distance Between Wells is available.

– The possibility to load and visualize Comment Log is available. Values of Com-
ment Log are text rows assigned to depth. Comment Log can be edited in Wells
Table.
– The possibility to edit marker visualization settings is available (color, width, line
type).
– The possibility to Show Marker Label on Well Section is available. Label color,
font and position can be set.
– The possibility to set common vertical scale for all wells is available.
– The possibility to set individual scale for each well is available.
– The possibility to edit discrete logs is available.
– The following hot keys are available:

12.3. Geology Designer 127

 20.1

∗ E – Edit/Create Well Markers;

∗ A – Edit Discrete Log;
∗ 2 – Decrease vertical scale;
∗ 1 – Increase vertical scale;
∗ T – Edit Logs Limits;
∗ Q – Find Well/Conn.
– The possibility to display Well Section horizontally is available.

• A new tab Geosteering is available:

– Configure geosteering: reference well, planned well, drilled well.

– Create synthetic log using reference well.
– Simultaneous display of two correlation profiles (planned well and drilled well)
and 2D view.

• Object Settings (Option is available via right mouse click on the object and choosing
Object Settings):

– The possibility to change object settings (property, horizon, log and other) is avail-
able: name, color, template that specifies object’s units and palette.
– The possibility to use standard templates or set user’s template is available.
– Discrete palette can be set for object templates. For templates one can set for each
value it’s name and color.

• The possibility to visualize properties according to zones is available (Zones Filter).

• The possibility to load horizons from RESCUE files is available.

12.4. Model Designer

In Model Designer 17.2:

• Floating tabs are available (2D, 3D, Histogram, Seismic, Wells Table, Well Section,
VPC, Crossplot, Geosteering) with the possibility to place them in separate windows or
next to each other through splitters.

• Multiple tabs with individual settings for each one can be created. For example, several
2D views with different settings can be created via menu View. Windows.

• Create a screenshot option has been updated for 2D, 3D visualization, graphs. A screen-
shot can be saved in vector or raster format, copied to clipboard or printed.

• The possibility to create models with hysteresis is available (check Hysteresis in Defi-
nitions tab).

12.4. Model Designer 128

 20.1

• Workflow:

– The possibility to create workflow automatically according to user’s actions is

available (Document. Record actions to user workflow).
– The possibility to uncheck temporary selected actions in workflow is available.
– The possibility to check consistency of the workflow before running it (button Test
in Workflow dialogue).
– Integration with Assisted History Matching module is available: variables can be
added to the workflow. Variables can be used in the following calculations: Prop-
erty Calculator, Adjust Variogram parameters, Property Interpolation, Create RP
Tables, Create Equil tables.

• Object Settings (Option is available via right mouse click on the object and choosing
Object Settings):

– The possibility to change object settings (property, horizon, log and other) is avail-
able: name, color, template that specifies object’s units and palette.
– The possibility to use standard templates or set user’s template is available.
– Discrete palette can be set for object templates. For templates one can set for each
value it’s name and color.

• Working with models in IM, ST, GE formats:

– The possibility to add keywords in formats ST, GE, IM is available (Create new
rule. User Keywords).
– The possibility to edit keywords in formats ST, GE, IM is available.
– The possibility to export keywords in formats ST, GE, IM is available (Document.
Export model in corresponding format).
– So model in ST, GE, IM can be loaded to Model Designer, edited and exported in
its initial format.

• Rules for wells:

– The possibility to set additional options in the rule Well Specification Parameters
is available: reference depth, drainage radius, crossflow flag and other.
– The possibility to load time in formats HH:MM:SS, HH,MM,SS, HH.MM.SS is
available in event and history loading dialogues. Also dates with hours can be
created in Schedule section.
– For thermal models historical data for steam injection can be loaded. Then it can
be used in WINJTEMP creation.

• The possibility to visualize properties according to zones is available (Zones Filter).

12.4. Model Designer 129

 20.1

12.5. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 17.2:

• Visualization of Phase Envelope has been updated. Vapour fraction is visualized via
color and (or) contour lines and filling.

• The possibility to work with Black Oil Variants is available. Black Oil Variants can be
created from Compositional Variants or loaded from file with standard keywords in E1
format. Data can be visualized and edited. Phase compressibility is calculated to analyze
consistency of PVT tables.

• PVT tables PVTO-PVTG can be created for subcritical area.

12.6. Network Designer

In tNavigator 17.2 the first implementation of Network Designer is available:

• The possibility to create and calculate the surface network is available (find network
characteristics in the internal points based on data specified at the boundary objects of
the network). Steady-state problem is considered.

• Fluid composition: compositional properties or black oil can be used.

• Integration with PVT Designer is provided.

• The following objects can be used to create network:

– Boundary network objects:

∗ Source;
∗ Sink.
– Inner network objects:
∗ Pipe;
∗ Link;
∗ Joint;
∗ Choke;
∗ Pump;
∗ Choke.

• The following options of pressure drop calculations are available:

– Pipe:
∗ One phase Moody’s correlation with Haaland’s correlation are used for calcu-
lation of the turbulent friction coefficient;
∗ Beggs&Brill multiphase correlation.

12.5. PVT Designer 130

 20.1

– Choke:
∗ Mechanistic correlation for subcritical/critical flow regimes;
∗ Ashford&Pierce correlation for subcritical/critical flow regimes.
– Pump/Compressor, the calculation can be based on:
∗ Pressure ratio;
∗ Pressure difference;
∗ Pressure after equipment;
∗ Equipment power.

• Graphical user interface to analyze results:

– Bubble Maps (pressure, mass flow rate) or 2D network visualization.

– Graph of pressure distribution along selected network branch.

• Control of network correctness:

– Detection of network’s parts, where a flow is absent, (active/non-active elements)

before running calculation.
– Detection inconsistency of heights of pipe end-points at pipe joints.
– Control of sufficiency of the number of boundary conditions (pressure, mass flow
rate).
– Control of setting equipment characteristics required for calculations.

12.7. Assisted History Matching

In Assisted History Matching 17.2:

• The contribution of each individual measurement to objective function can be adjusted.

• Table with R2 coefficients is available to analyze quality of history matching.

12.8. Compatibility with previous versions

In tNavigator 17.2:

• To run AHM or uncertainty from Model Designer and Geology Designer variables can
be added only in workflows (compatibility with previous versions is not provided).

12.9. Licenses and License server

In tNavigator 17.2:

• New license module is supported: Network Designer.

12.7. Assisted History Matching 131

 20.1

12.10. Manuals
In tNavigator 17.2 the following technical documentation is available:

• tNavigator Library;

• User Manual;

• User Guide;

• Assisted History Matching User Guide;

• PVT Designer User Guide;

• Designer User Guide (Geology Designer, Model Designer);

• Batch Jobs User Guide;

• Remote GUI User Guide;

• Installation and License Guide;

• Release Notes.

In tNavigator 17.2 the following new training tutorials are available:

• Module Assisted History Matching:

– 8-8_HowToGoFromAHMtoForecast.

• Module Geology Designer:

– 9-3_HowToUsePetrophysicalModeling;
– 9-4_HowToUseSeismicInterpretation;
– 9-5_HowToUseCorrelation.

12.10. Manuals 132

 20.1

13. tNavigator 17.1

In 2017 tNavigator version enumeration is updated. Now the version number consists in two
last digits of the year and the number of release in this year, separated via a dot. For ex-
ample, 4 tNavigator versions in 2017 will have the following numeration: 17.1, 17.2, 17.3,
17.4, corresponding to the numbers of quarters when these versions are released. Update of
enumeration system has a goal to make it easier for users to identify current and out-of-date
versions.

The key improvements in 17.1 are:

• Geology module is split in Geology Designer and Model Designer, licensed separately.
Geology Designer – building geological model from scratch. Model Designer – pre-
processor to build dynamic model. PVT Designer is included in both licenses Geology
Designer and Model Designer.

• In Geology Designer there is a first implementation of tools to load and work with 3D
seismic data.

• In this release there is a first implementation of CPU+GPU simulation engine: calcula-

tion speed-up can be obtained due to solving systems of linear equations using graphics
accelerators NVidia. The only GPUs starting Pascal architecture are supported (and
latest CUDA drivers) to utilize GPU functionality.

• The algorithm of solving linear systems is enhanced.

• The following default parameters are modified:

– For the keyword RUNCTRL, the option MAXLINIT (which is the maximum num-
ber of iterations used for solving linear systems) is set to 400 by default;
– For the keyword RUNCTRL the option TMAXMULT (which is the maximum
multiplier used to multiply the current time step length during the next time step
calculation) is set to 3 by default;
– For the keyword TNAVCTRL the option SCALE_MATRIX is used by default: it
is set to 1 (or YES).

• The design of the main window is modified in order to allow a more comfortable access
to all the modules.

• The access to the Manuals is available from the main window. To read the Manuals
any pdf reader is needed.

• 32-bit versions on all platforms are not supported anymore.

• For Windows Platform Windows 7 (SP1) operating systems or newer are supported.

13. tNavigator 17.1 133

 20.1

13.1. tNavigator kernel

In tNavigator 17.1 kernel new options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
MO, IM, ST, GE.

Reservoir Coupling:
• Dynamic restarts are available in graphical interface, options --continue, --restart are
available for console, automatic restarts. Restart MASTER and SLAVE models can be
used.
For models in E1 and E3 formats:
• The possibility to set the salt concentration in the injection stream via user defined
quantity UDQ (2nd parameter of the keyword WSALT).

• The possibility to set group name, whose produced polymer (salt) concentration will
be used in the injection stream for the well (4th and 5th parameters of the keyword
WPOLYMER).

• Artificial lift quantity (ALQ) value can be set and used in the pressure loss calculations
for the group’s pipeline (4th parameter of the keyword GRUPNET).

• CIRR mode is available to set injectivity multiplier for injectors. Injectivity increase
is not reversed for all connections. Connections continue working with its maximum
attained injectivity multiplier (4the parameter of the keyword WINJMULT).

• The possibility to set the grid block pressure limit for well rate cutback or for reversing
the cutback process (8th and 9th parameters of the keyword WCUTBACK).

• The algorithm of surface network calculation has been updated.

For models in E1 format:
• Temperature effects can be taken into account using polymer option (keywords
PLYVISCT, TEMPNODE).

• The possibility to use temperature option with API is available (3rd parameter of the
keyword VISCREF).
For models in E3 format:
• TRACK option is supported for compositional models (keywords TRACK, TRACK-
REG).

• Molecular diffusion can be used in compositional models (keywords DIFFCGO, DIF-

FCOG).

• Separator’s stage can be set to defined composition of injected fluid (5th parameter of
the keyword WINJGAS).

13.1. tNavigator kernel 134

 20.1

For models in ST format:

• Thermal conductivity options COMPLEX and TEMPER are available (keyword

THCONMIX COMPLEX, TEMPER).

Data input-output. Reports:

• The following parameters are available in SUMMARY section: ANQP, ANQT, ANQR,
FNQT, FNQR, FOPV, FWPV, FGPV, ROPV, RWPV, RGPV.

• The possibility to save AQUIFERA, AQUIFERL and AQUIFERN properties in the

INIT file.

• The possibility to save tracers’ concentrations in .UNRST file.

• The possibility to load history from files in fhf format (Field History File format).

Special options:

• For models in E1 and E3 formats D-factor correlation coefficients can be set for certain
block with connections (in global grid and LGR) (the keyword WDFACCORL).

• For models in E1 and E3 formats average pressure can be calculated taking into ac-
count virtual perforations of hydraulic fractures (options FALL and FOPEN of the 4th
parameter of the keyword WPAVE).

13.2. Model Designer

In Model Designer 17.1:

• The following possibilities has been added to the option Import Data From Existing
Model:

– Models in ST, GE, IM, MO can be loaded and analyzed (editing and export is
supported only partly).
– Compositional models in E3 format can be loaded. Fluid properties can be visual-
ized in the tab Fluid Properties. Compositional Properties.

• The data defined via the keywords PRVD, ROCKTAB can be loaded to the tab Fluid
Properties and visualized.

• The possibility to visualize projections of wells trajectories on the Cross-Section if they

are not far that defined distance from it (2D. Cross-Section. Advanced Settings. Use
distance to Trajectory).

• The possibility to create Property Filter setting the ranges or several 3D properties is
available.

13.2. Model Designer 135

 20.1

• Crossplots can be created for 3D properties. Property Filter can be used for Crossplots
and trend lines can be visualized.

• Several tables Well Production Table and Well Structure Table can be created. In
the tab Wells Data. Rules the name of production (structure) table should be specified
when a new rule is added.

• The possibility to create new rules is available (in accordance with the corresponding
keywords):

– Drawdown Limit for Well (WELDRAW).

– Group Efficiency Factor (GEFAC).
– Economic Limits for Production Group (GECON).
– Gas Lift Optimization for Groups (GLIFTOPT).

• The possibility to apply a Rule to wells from the Well Filter. Each Rule can be applied
to one well, all wells or wells from the Well Filter.

• The possibility to create Wells and Groups Filter, which affects the SCHEDULE section
export. This filter can be set on specific date. When the model is exported only the data
from Rules for wells and groups from this filter is saved in the SCHEDULE section.

• Well Filter can be used to visualize Rules. Rules will be visualized only for selected
wells and groups.

13.3. Geology Designer

In Geology Designer 17.1:

• Polygons can be imported in the formats CPS-3 lines and Polygon lines.

• Point sets can be imported in the formats CPS-3 lines and Point set lines.

• Point sets can be exported in the format xyz.

• Adjust to Source Distribution option can be used in SGS property interpolation.

• The possibility to visualize projections of wells trajectories on the Cross-Section if they

are not far that defined distance from it (2D. Cross-Section. Advanced Settings. Use
distance to Trajectory).

• The possibility to create Property Filter setting the ranges or several 3D properties is
available.

• Crossplots can be created for 3D properties. Property Filter can be used for Crossplots
and trend lines can be visualized.

13.3. Geology Designer 136

 20.1

• There is a first implementation of tools to load and work with 3D seismic data:

– Loading of 3D seismic data in SEG-Y format is available.

– The possibility to create and visualized (2D and 3D) Inlines, Crosslines and time-
slices.
– The possibility to create horizon manually via seismic 3D data is available.

13.4. PVT Designer

In PVT Designer 17.1:

• The possibility to match automatically chosen parameters with defined laboratory data
(Samples) obtained in several different experiments. The possibility to set weight of
experiment and weight of measured sample is available.

• The possibility to mix two compositions is available (Blend experiment).

13.5. Assisted History Matching

In Assisted History Matching 17.1:

• The possibility to use Assisted History Matching module for model in the formats ST,
GE, IM (scenarios from graphical interface can be started or DEFINES keywords can be
set in the DATA-file).

• The possibility to add variables to the base model is available. New variables can be
added in the DATA-file or defined in History Matching Variables Manager in graphical
interface.

• Multidimensional scaling is available to visualize variants on 2D (tab MDS).

• Variants Clusterization can be created for variables values.

• The possibility to group model variants and set visualization properties for each group
independently on Graphs and Crossplots (Create Group Set From Selected Variants).

• The possibility to set user variants – experimental design matrix (Experimental Design.
Custom).

• The following scenarios started from graphical interface are available: Multiply Poro
Volume by Regions, Multiply Transmissibility by Regions.

• The possibility to visualize the allowable mismatch range on Graphs (the range for each
parameter is defined in Objective Function dialogue as Deviation).

• The possibility to create forecasts from selected variants.

13.4. PVT Designer 137

 20.1

13.6. Graphical User Interface

In Graphical User Interface 17.1:

• In Schedule table the following features has been added:

– Separate tabs for keywords specifying Group operations and Network opera-
tions.
– The column with Group name. Keywords in the list can be sorted via this name.
– The possibility to choose the columns to visualize.

13.7. Compatibility with previous versions

In tNavigator 17.1:

• Obsolete commands of command line have been removed -t, --report-tables.

• If you have a functioning network license with Geology module on license server below
4.2.6 it is necessary to update license server to 17.1 to continue using geological tools
in tNavigator 17.1.

• 32-bit versions on all platforms are not supported anymore.

• For Windows Platform Windows 7 (SP1) operating systems or newer are supported.

13.8. Licenses and License server

In tNavigator 17.1:

• New license modules are supported: Geology Designer, Model Designer, Network
Designer.

• Geology module is split by Geology Designer and Model Designer. For network li-
censes and local usb-licenses, that contain Geology module, tNavigator and license
server 17.1 convert automatically each license of Geology module to the pair Geology
Designer and Model Designer.

13.9. Manuals
In tNavigator 17.1:

• The following technical descriptions are available:

– User Manual;
– User Guide;
– Modules Geology Designer, Model Designer User Guide;

13.6. Graphical User Interface 138

 20.1

– tNavigator Arithmetic Manual;

– tNavigator Release Description.

• Clicking on the button Export in the menu Manuals will lead to the export of all the
available technical descriptions in the language corresponding to the current language
of the interface.

13.9. Manuals 139

 20.1

14. tNavigator 4.2.6

In tNavigator 4.2.6 a new module of tNavigator PVT Designer is available. In PVT Designer
it is possible to choose components, conduct experiments, load laboratory measurement data,
execute an automatic matching of chosen parameters in accordance with measured data (re-
gression) and create PVT tables.

14.1. tNavigator kernel

In tNavigator 4.2.6 kernel new options are supported for models in E1, E3, MO, IM, ST, GE
formats.

For models in E1 and E3 formats the following options are supported:

• For the group control mode it is possible to limit the surface water and gas production
rate by the fraction of the corresponding phase injection rate (18 and 19 parameters of
the keyword GCONPROD, and PBWS, PBGS values in parameter 2 of the keyword
GCONPROD).

• The possibility to take into account the dependence of polymer adsorption on salt con-
centration (keywords ADSALNOD, PLYADSS).

• The possibility to take into account a passive tracer absorption (keywords TRROCK,
TRADS).

• The possibility to generate horizontal pinchout connections via defining the pinchout
threshold widths in X and Y direction, respectively (keyword PINCHXY).

• The use of keyword MULTREGT in SCHEDULE section is supported (multipliers are

accumulated, i.e. the resultant multiplier is the product of previous dates multipliers).

• The compatibility setting to coarse grid calculations is supported (value 1 should be set
for the parameter 141 of the keyword OPTIONS).

• The possibility to use the option of velocity dependent relative permeability in pseudo-
pressure calculation (parameter 4 of the keyword PICOND).

For models in MO format:

• For the well gas inflow simulation the Russell-Goodrich (R-G) equation and pseudo-
pressure (P-P) option are available (keywords GPP, MPGP, WGPP, WMPG, RG, WRG).

• The option AREA allowing to calculate the analytical aquifer productivity index is
available (keyword AQWO).

• For the black-oil model the temperature expansion is supported (keywords THER,
UOIL, UGAS, UWAT, UROC, THCO, THCG, THCW, THCR, OVVT, GVVT, TEMP).

14. tNavigator 4.2.6 140

 20.1

For models in E3 format:

• The possibility to define the target or limit of the total molar rate is available (parameter
20 of the keyword WELLINJE).
• For simulations of isothermal compositional models several water components can be
chosen (keywords WNAMES, COMPW, PREFW, DREFW, VREFW, CREFW, WI,
WMF, WMFVD, AQSTREAW).
• For isothermal compositional models three components asphaltene model is available.
This model allows to simulate the variation of "mobile" pore volume caused by asphal-
tene deposition process (keywords ASPDEPO).
Data input-output. Reports:
• The possibility to save Maps in UNRST/UNSMRY binary format (the keyword RP-
TRST with parameters FOAMMOB, VELOCITY, VISC).
• The possibility to save binary SUMMARY files either separately for each reporting time
step, or as a unified one (keywords UNIFOUTS, MULTOUTS).
Special options:
• The choke can be set and the fluid flow pressure through the choke using correlation
formulas can be computed (the keyword NETCHOKE).
• For water-gas two phase model (E1 format) it is possible to define phase relative per-
meability using Corey and Let correlations (keywords COREYWG, LETWG).
• The well geometry is taken into account when calculating a bottom hole pressure
via a wellhead pressure using VFP correlations (keywords WELLINCL, WELLDATA,
WELLBRANCH).
• The geometry of analytical aquifer connection to the reservoir can be detailed defining
a connection on specified depth, to the reservoir bottom, to the reservoir boundary and
different ways of productivity index calculation (the keyword AQUGP).
• The possibility to deactivate blocks by their depth value is available (the keyword
DEACDEPT).
• For hydraulic fracturing simulations it is possible to create User Maps and User Cuts
using virtual perforations (wmvc function) allowing to visualize blocks with virtual
perforations generated by hydraulic fractures.
• The possibility to create User Maps and User Cuts picking out all blocks which a well
trajectory passes through (function wmtc).
MPI version:
• IDW interpolation method can be used.

14.1. tNavigator kernel 141

 20.1

14.2. Model Designer

In tNavigator 4.2.6 Model Designer the following features are added:
• The possibility to save and run WorkFlows, i.e. to create, copy, modify and start a
calculation sequence.

• Templates are available for Well correlation profile (Well Section): it is possible to
create, copy and edit templates (it is possible to move the objects on panels and change
their settings).

• It is possible to load objects in the following formats:

– Well trajectory, wellhead, markers, events, Well Logs: Landmark OWX files *.asc;
– Horizons: Surfer 7 GRD (Bin) Format, Z-Map Plus Format, GXF-3 Format;
– Faults: Surfer 7 GRD (Bin), Surfer BLN file, Landmark Fault 3d;
– Polygons: Surfer BLN files, TKS Polygons.

• It is possible to interpolate 2D Maps via Wells Attributes using the following methods:
IDW, Kriging, Gauss Simulation, Least Squares.

• For Well Section the scale can be defined manually.

• Cross-Sections can be visualized in 3D mode as planes.

• Well Logs, Horizons, Markers, Maps, Points Sets and Wells Attributes can be presented
via Histograms.

• The Statistics table for Histograms is available.

• Advanced properties are available for Histograms and VPC.

• User section SCHEDULE can be loaded into Model Designer (data are visualized in
Well Data. Rules).

• The possibility to rearrange rules in the Rules tree is available (date and rule execution
order can be changed).

• The possibility to define well control on THP and VFP tables for injection wells is
available.

• The possibility to choose oil as injected fluid for injection group control is available.

• The well construction on Well Section can be visualized and modified.

• The possibility to load measurement data for VFP tables is available, after that matching
for VFP tables on measured data can be done.

• The possibility to create VFP tables taking into account the well trajectory is available.

14.2. Model Designer 142

 20.1

14.3. PVT Designer

In tNavigator 4.2.6 PVT Designer:

• The Graphical user interface was optimized.

• New experiments are available (Separator Test, Swelling Test, Compositional Grading).

• The phase phase envelope can be plotted and the critical mixture point can be deter-
mined.

• For all experiments it is possible to define measurement data and automatically match
chosen parameters according to defined laboratory data.

• New component grouping algorithms (lumping) automatically computing component

weight coefficients in pseudo-components are available.

• The obtained results can be exported in E1 and E3 format files.

14.4. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.2.6 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added::

• The Plackett-Burman experimental design method is implemented.

• The optimization algorithm can be started from the initial population defined by the
user.

• The algorithm may be set up to terminate when the objective function does not improve
during the defined number of iterations.

• Automatic restrictions are added to scenario calculating possible relative permeability

end points values (e.g., SW L ≤ SWCR).

• For optimization algorithms in assisted history matching it is possible to choose his-

torical data that will be taken (or not) into account. I.e. the possibility to choose the
historical points for objective function calculation is available.

• PLT measurements can be used in Assisted History Matching.

14.5. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.2.6 Graphical User Interface:

• Logarithmic scale can be used for Crossplots Graph Templates.

• Arbitrary icons for wells on 2D maps can be loaded (Preferences. Well and connection
icons).

14.3. PVT Designer 143

 20.1

• Fonts and Units can be set in Bubble Maps.

• In the Schedule table new tabs with keywords defining Multisegment Wells, Economic
Limits, Drilling and Workovers are available.

• ALQ graph for network is visualized (Analysis Tab).

• Visualization of Flow graphs for numerical Aquifers is available.

14.6. Compatibility with previous versions

In tNavigator 4.2.6:

• The option allowing pressure to increase going up the network is not supported anymore
(option INCREASENETWORKP of the keyword TNAVCTRL).

14.6. Compatibility with previous versions 144

 20.1

15. tNavigator 4.2.5

15.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.2.5 new kernel options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
IM, ST, GE.

For models in E1 and E3 format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to use INSTANT option for Coal Bed Methane Model (parameter IN-
STANT of the keyword CBMOPTS).

• The possibility to set the control mode for injectors that work in the history matching
mode: injection rate control or BHP control (parameter 12 of the keyword WCONINJH).

• The possibility to control the inheriting process of the threshold pore volumes (MINPV
or MINPVV) for LGR blocks (46th parameter of the keyword OPTIONS).

• The possibility to set tracer decay half-life (the keyword TRDCY).

For models in E1 format the following options are supported:

• Foam modeling option (keywords FOAM, FOAMOPTS, FOAMADS, FOAMROCK,

FOAMDCYW, FOAMDCYO, FOAMMOB, FOAMMOBS, FOAMMOBP, SFOAM,
WFOAM).

• The possibility to set several gas producers, that are opening from the drilling queue
when the sales gas production rate falls below the minimum limit (the keyword
WGASPROD).

For models in E3 format the following options are supported:

• For isothermal compositional models Residual oil modeling option is available (key-
words SOR, SOILR, ROMF, SOROPTS).

• For isothermal compositional models 2-component Asphaltene option is available (key-

words ASPHALTE, ASPP1P, ASPREWG, ASPP2P, ASPPW2D, ASPFLRT, ASPVISO,
CATYPE).

For models in IM format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to set bubble points pressure as a map for models with equilibrium
(VERTICAL DEPTH_AVE) initialization (PB ALL).

For models in GE format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to set model geometry via specifying blocks tops (the keyword COR-
NERS).

15. tNavigator 4.2.5 145

 20.1

Data input-output. Reports:

• The possibility to dump RSM-file with simulation results is available for all model
formats (E1, E3, IM, ST, GE, MO).
The keywords SEPARATE and RUNSUM are supported for models in formats E1, E3.
For console version the command --ecl-rsm can be used. Dump of the RSM-file can be
requested from graphical user interface (File. Reports) and from remote graphical user
interface (in Model Queue).

• The possibility to create a template to dump graphs in E1 binary format and RSM-file is
available. These templates can be saved and used in several models (also for models in
not E1 input syntax). The template can be used in Model Queue for cluster calculations.
Special options:
• The possibility to generate PVT tables automatically via the input component properties
is available for black oil models in format E1 (the keyword PVTGEN). PVT tables are
created and used in simulation. In this case in the PROPS section component properties
should be specified in E3 format instead of PVT-tables.

• The possibility to set model geometry via specifying blocks tops is available for model
in formats E1, E3 (the keyword CORNERS). The GRID files is dumped automatically
for models with the keyword CORNERS.

• The possibility to control foam/tracer participation in decay process (option DE-

CAY_MODEL of the keyword TNAVCTRL).

15.2. Model Designer

In tNavigator 4.2.5 the following features are added to Model Designer:
• The possibility to create several Correlation profiles for Well Section is available. Use
Well Selector to pick wells on 2D view.

• The possibility to "put" horizon on markers is available (Calculations. Interpolation.

Discrepancies Elimination).

• The possibility to load horizons and faults in the format Surfer 7GRD is available.

• The possibility to load polygons and faults in the binary format SurferBln is available.

• The possibility to choose and delete objects from the object list is available, the possi-
bility to delete all objects from the folder (use Shift to choose several objects).

• The possibility to calculate Residuals for horizon interpolation. Residuals are calculated
automatically as Wells Attributes (difference between marker depth and the point where
well trajectory intersects a new horizon). Visualization is available on 2D Maps, Wells
Table and Statistics.

15.2. Model Designer 146

 20.1

• The possibility to add wells on 2D Maps has been added. The following drawing options
are available:

– Drawing on the selected depth.

– Intersection with horizon.
– Well head.
– Bottom hole.

• The possibility to calculate geometric volume in a specified polygon between two sur-
faces (User Maps. Auxiliary Calculations. Assign between surfaces).

• The possibility to average log-data for wells between markers is available: netpay, poros-
ity, permeability, NTG and other (Well Attributes. Average Log Between Markers).

• The possibility to create special 2D Maps is available: top and bottom of the collector,
netpay, porosity, permeability, NTG and other (2D Maps. Auxiliary Calculations. 2D
Map by 3D Map).

• The possibility to replace PVT and RP correlations by generated tables. Then tables can
be edited manually (Replace by generated tables button).

• The possibility to load capillary pressure to existing RP correlations (Import. Load Pcap
tables. Load the file with keywords SWOF, SGOF).

• The possibility to load RP data defined by Corey correlation (COREYWO, COREYGO)

and capillary pressure in table form (SWOF, SGOF).

• New operator is available in arithmetics: IF-THEN-ELSE-ENDIF. if operator with

brackets {} is not supported in this version and further.

• In the table with User Keywords (Well Data. Rules. User Keywords) the following
options are available:

– the possibility to move lines (data of the event is changed according to the new
position);
– copy the line with keyword (Right mouse click. Duplicate Keywords);
– Keyword Editing. The pop-up hint for all parameters is available in all editing
modes;
– the possibility to switch between Table and Text form for keyword Adding and
Editing.

• New options are available to create Assisted History Matching project from Model
Designer:

– A scenario to create variables for relative permeabilities defined via Corey corre-
lation is available.

15.2. Model Designer 147

 20.1

– The possibility to use interpolation parameters as variables is available.

– Variables can be used in Calculator.

15.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.2.5 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added:

• The new approach to create variables to edit relative permeabilities for models with
many saturation regions is implemented.

• In the scenario to create variables from graphical user interface (for end-point scaling
and relative permeabilities defined via Corey correlations): the possibility to set one
variable for several regions is available.

• The possibility to combine different type of objects in the objective function is available
(add terms in objective function dialogue).

• The possibility to change the ranges of several variables at the same time.

15.4. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.2.5 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• New operator is available in arithmetics: IF-THEN-ELSE-ENDIF (can be used in User

Maps, User Cuts, ARITHMETIC keyword in the .data-file).

• Visualization of the Cross-Sections is available in 3D view (3D Map). A Cross-Section

can be visualized as a plane in 3D view (Check Show Cross-Section).

• The possibility to create templates for Bubble Maps is available. Bubble Maps can be
visualized for wells, groups, network nodes. These templates can be exported and used
in other models.

• Well Filter has been improved. Filter to choose group of wells or network nodes is
available. Groups and nodes that are selected are visualized on 2D Maps.

• The possibility to manage the visualization of group structure and surface network is
available. Press right mouse click on the object to add or remove it itself (of with
subordinate objects) from visualization filter.

• Well Selection option has been improved. Wells can be selected on 2D Map: one by
one, by rectangle in inside the curve of any arbitrary shape (use Shift, Ctrl to select
wells in several zones, one by one mode). The selected wells can be used in the Well
Filter.

• The possibility to smooth well trajectories on 3D Maps and 2D maps is available (Doc-
ument. Preferences. Well Options).

15.3. Assisted History Matching 148

 20.1

• The visualization of the map of linear solver residual is available (Calculated Maps.
Number of Convergence problems). This map should be requested via the option CON-
VERGENCE_PROBLEM_NUM of the keyword TNAVCTRL.

15.5. Licenses and License server

In tNavigator 4.2.5:

• The licensing module has been modified to optimize the resources consumption and
reduce delays.

• The statistics about current license utilization is available in the format Open iT LicPoll.

• New license type is available – Large Data Set. This license can replace any number of
Black Oil licenses (more then 8) for corresponding tasks.

15.5. Licenses and License server 149

 20.1

16. tNavigator 4.2.4

16.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.2.4 new kernel options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
IM, ST, GE.

Reservoir Coupling support:

• The possibility to couple models with different physics is available: black oil, composi-
tional, thermal. Models can be in different formats: E1, E3, IM, ST, GE.

• The possibility to couple models with common surface network is available (keywords
for Standard network option are available).

For models in E1 and E3 format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to update skin-factor for connections (the keyword CSKIN).

• The possibility to use an operation MAXR when a maximum rate limit is violated –
maximization of the future production rate by setting the reinjection fraction limit to 1
(parameter 5 of the keyword GCONSALE).

• The possibility to set the value of gas consumption for extended network nodes (the
keyword NCONSUMP).

• The possibility to activate pressure modifications to achieve initial equilibration (option

QUIESC the keyword EQLOPTS).

• The possibility to use automatic compressors for standard network option (parameters
1-3 of the keyword GASFCOMP).

• The possibility to use the following group control mode – production balancing fraction
(parameter PRBL of the keyword GCONPROD).

• The possibility to prevent the well changing from rate control to THP control when it is
constrained to operate on the unstable side of its VFP curve (parameter 4 of the keyword
WVFPEXP).

• The possibility to set minimum interval between gas lift optimizations (parameter 3 of
the keyword LIFTOPT).

For models in E3 format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to set the distribution of CO2 component between water and hydrocarbon
phases via the table data as a function on pressure (keywords CO2SOL, SOLUBILI,
RSWVD, RSW).

16. tNavigator 4.2.4 150

 20.1

• For thermal models the control by water saturation pressure and temperature can be
used (options SATT and SATP of the keywords WCONPROD, WELLPROD).

For models in IM, ST, GE format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to use analytical Fetkovich aquifer (the keyword AQMETHOD

(*FETKOVITCH)).

• The possibility to connect analytical aquifer to the reservoir boundary (the keyword
AQUIFER (*BOUNDARY, *RESBND)).

For models in IM format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to use the model of polymer flood (keywords MODEL POLYMER,
PADSORP, PPERM, PMIX LINEAR, NONLINEAR, TABLE, VELTABLE, PREF-
CONC, PVISC).

• The possibility to set block and direction dependent pressure gradient thresholds (key-
words PTHRESHI, PTHRESHJ, PTHRESHK).

• The possibility to set grid corner point geometry (the keyword CORNERS).

For models in GE format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to set different ways to calculate the density of the stock-tank oil and
gas after separator (the option STREAM-DEN in the keyword SEPARATOR (*EOS,
*GASLAW)).

Special options:

• The possibility to use modified Corey correlations to set relative permeabilities

(COREYWOMOD, COREYGOMOD).

• For models in E1 and E3 formats the new operation can be used when the group limit is
exceeded (option TARG in the 7th parameter of the keyword GCONPROD). The option
works analogously to the RATE option with the following difference. When RATE
option is specified, then the corresponding limit is always checked, when TARG option
is specified, then the group limit is removed when it can’t be performed.

• The fully implicit option can be used to calculate analytical aquifers (the keyword
AQUOPTS (FI, FI_ELIM_AQ_VAR)).

• The possibility to set model initialization and calculation logic compatibility with dif-
ferent versions of other simulators (option COMPATIBILITY of the keyword TNAVC-
TRL).

• The possibility to use the model with zero number of time steps as a base model for
restart (forecast).

16.1. tNavigator kernel 151

 20.1

16.2. Model Designer

In tNavigator 4.2.4 the following features are added to Model Designer:

• New options are available to create Assisted History Matching project from Model
Designer:

– A scenario to create variables is available – equilibration parameters (contacts’

depths).
– The visualization of analytical data is available (crossplots, Pearson correlation,
Tornado chart).

• The possibility to use separators in PVT experiments option is available.

• The visualization of the keywords loaded from SCHEDULE section is available for E1
format. User can edit existing keywords and add new keywords.

• The possibility to add arbitrary time steps (Time step editor).

• The possibility to set the coordinate reference system (Datum). The system can be set in
Document, Settings. Coordinate reference system can be found using its name, country
or EPSG code. In the tab Detailed Information the datum information and the ellipsoid
is provided.

• This visualization of Contour lines is available on 2D Maps (check Show Contour lines,
Color by Contour lines).

• The following options are available for data loading:

– load grid in gridecl format (in the current version the grid can be loaded without
LGR);
– the possibility to merge curves with the same names when curves are loaded.

• Facial Analysis is available (User Maps. Facial Analysis can be used to create fa-
cies, then reservoir properties maps can be created using facies. Different interpolation
parameters can be set in different zones).

• The following options are available on Well Section tab:

– The date of measurement can be visualized for LOG curves (LAS, RFT/MDT)
(can be unchecked in Properties).
– One LOG curve (LAS, RFT/MDT) can be visualized at the same time at different
dates and with different visualization settings. Duplicate the curve and set in its
Properties the number of date you need and other visualization parameters.
– The scale with block numbers is available.

• The possibility to edit maps on 2D view via Brush button is available.

16.2. Model Designer 152

 20.1

16.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.2.4 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added:

• A new scenario is available to create variables from graphical user interface – Multiply
Permeability by Layers.

16.4. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.2.4 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• The possibility to move the points of well trajectory using mouse is available.

• The visualization of Bubble maps for groups and network nodes is available.

• In the option Schedule (tabs Well Definition, Well Production, Other operations, All
operations) the pop-up tips for keywords are available.

• The possibility to reload model and start calculations immediately is available (Docu-
ment. Reload model and Run Calculations).

• The possibility to cut wells’ trajectories by depth (Z direction) is available (for visual-
ization) (Document. Settings. Well Options. Check the box Cut Trajectory by Depth).

• The following options are available on Well Section tab:

– The date of measurement can be visualized for LOG curve (LAS, RFT/MDT) (can
be unchecked in Properties).
– One LOG curve (LAS, RFT/MDT) can be visualized at the same time at different
dates and with different visualization settings. Duplicate the curve and set in its
Properties the number of date you need and other visualization parameters.
– The scale with block numbers is available.

16.5. Licenses and License server

In tNavigator 4.2.4:

• The possibility to use multiple licenses on a local dongle is available. Thus, it is possible
to have more than one for each type of the license on the dongle. So if you have multiple
licenses then the corresponding number of models can be calculated at the same time.

16.3. Assisted History Matching 153

 20.1

17. tNavigator 4.2.3

17.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.2.3 new kernel options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
IM, ST.
In this release there is a first implementation of Reservoir Coupling option for integrated cal-
culation of several models using common group controls.
Also in this release there is a first implementation of compositional models in GE format.

Reservoir Coupling support:

• Option is set via the keywords SLAVES, GRUPMAST, GRUPSLAV.

• Several SLAVE models are integrated via one MASTER model.

• In this release only black oil models can be used in coupling in all supported data
formats: E1, MO or IM.

• MASTER model must be in E1 format. It can be full-featured model or simple fake

model with one active grid block.

• There is fully implicit model calculation. Equations from all models are combined to
one common system of equations that describes the whole integrated reservoir.

For models in GE format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to use cubic equation of state: Soave-Redlich-Kwong equation or Peng-

Robinson equation (the keyword MODEL).

• The possibility to set multiple equations of state is available (EOS) (the keywords EOS-
SET, EOSTYPE). In each region component properties can be set (the keywords MW,
PCRIT, VCRIT, TCRIT, ZCRIT, BIN, PCHOR), coefficients of equations of state (the
keywords AC, OMEGA, OMEGB), and the volume shift (the keyword VSHIFT).

• HZYT and PEDERSEN correlations can be used for hydrocarbon phases viscosity sim-
ulation (the keywords VISCOR, VISVC, MIXVC, VISCOEFF).

• Separators can be set for resources calculation (the keyword SEPARATOR) and for
wells (the keyword WELSEP).

• Fully implicit and adaptive implicit (the keyword AIM) methods can be used.

For models in E1 and E3 format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to set maximum allowed number of open wells subordinate to the group
for which economic limits are set (parameter 9 of the keyword GECON).

17. tNavigator 4.2.3 154

 20.1

• The possibility to set an interpolation method for Artificial Lift Quantity ALQ in VFP
tables (the keyword VFPTABL).

• Autonomous inflow control devices (ICD) can be used in multisegment wells (the key-
word WSEGAICD).

• The possibility to set the time limits taken for well automatic workovers when group
economic limits are violated (the keyword WORKLIM).

• The possibility to set Artificial Lift Quantity (ALQ) that is used in the pressure loss
calculations for the branch in extended network (parameter 4 of the keyword BRAN-
PROP).

• The possibility to set well cutback limits (the keyword GCUTBACK).

• The possibility to set the phase for which group’s guide rate is calculated (parameter 10
of the keyword GCONPROD).

• The possibility to set the decrement for contract gas rate and conditions to cut group’s
rate in DCQ option – Gas Field Model (the keywords GASFTARG, GASFDECR).

• The possibility to set guide rate wells’ values (the keyword WELLGR).

• The possibility to set the way to extrapolate VFP table values for water fraction, gas
fraction and ALQ (parameter 5 of the keyword WVFPEXP).

• The possibility to set the multiplier which is used to calculate the matrix-fracture flows
in dual porosity models (the keyword MULTMF).

• The possibility to set transmissibility multipliers for all cells in specified faults in sched-
ule section (the keyword MULTFLT).

For models in E1 format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to use polymer shear thinning/thickening logarithmic model (the key-
word PLYSHLOG).

For models in E3 format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to set the oil viscosity dependence on pressure via PVCO table for
thermal models.

• The possibility to set temperature, pressure, specific enthalpy rate and steam quality of
the injected fluid for thermal models (parameters 21-24 of the keyword WELLINJE).

For models in IM, ST, GE format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to smooth relative permeabilities (parameters LINEAR, QUAD, CUBIC

of the keyword SMOOTHEND).

17.1. tNavigator kernel 155

 20.1

• The possibility to set water saturation below water-oil contact (the keyword WOC_SW).

• The possibility to set reference pressure for pore volume calculation the first block of
the region (option REFFIRST of the keyword ROCKOPTS).

For models in ST format the following options are supported:

• IDEALGAS option is available.

Special options:

• A new tNavigator data format is implemented. This format is an extension of E1, E3

formats that provides more convenient definition of well data (to set trajectories in X,
Y, Z, MD and perforations in measured depth) (the keywords WELLTRACK, COMP-
DATMD).

• The possibility to smooth relative permeabilities for models in E1 and E3 (the keyword
KRSMOOTH).

• The new keyword AQUOPTS is implemented to set parameters for analytic aquifers
calculation for models in format E1 and E3.

Data input output:

• A new option KEYWORDS_SPACE is added to the keyword TNAVCTRL for models

in format E1 and E3. If this setting is set to 1 the keywords that are written after the
space symbol at the beginning of the line are read. By default this option is not used,
these keywords are ignored, and the corresponding message will be visualized.

• A new option LONGNAMES is added to the keyword TNAVCTRL for models in format
E1 and E3. If this setting is set to 1 then tNavigator will read well names that are longer
than 8 symbols. For default without this setting there is a cut for names that are longer
that 8 symbols.

• The possibility to save the reporting parameters for wells, groups in binary files in
UNRST/UNSMRY format export at calculation time steps when the model is calculated
by tNavigator console version. Option is used for default. It can be switched off using
the keyword RPTONLY. If UNRST/UNSMRY binary files are saved from graphical
user interface they will be saved at reporting (not calculation) steps.

• The output of the threshold pressure between equilibration THPRES to .log-file is avail-
able.

17.2. Model Designer

In tNavigator 4.2.3 the following features are added to Model Designer:

17.2. Model Designer 156

 20.1

• The possibility to save model in a new tNavigator data format is implemented. This
format is an extension of E1, E3 formats that provides more convenient definition of
well data (to set trajectories in X, Y, Z, MD and perforations in measured depth) (the
keywords WELLTRACK, COMPDATMD).

• The possibility to visualize and edit well trajectories, markers and Wells Logs in table
form.

• The possibility to create PVT tables for oil and gas (black oil models) using input
compositional properties. The following options are supported:

– Component sets can be created using the standard list or can be imported as a text
file.
– CCE, DLE, CVD experiments can be simulated for a component set; the criti-
cal point of the mixture can be calculated; bubble point pressure dependence on
temperature can be build.
– The results of experiments are visualized as graphs and tables.
– PVT tables for oil and gas can be calculated via a component set and chosen
parameters.
– PVT tables are visualized as graphs and tables.
– PVT tables can be added to the model, or exported to a text file.

• The possibility to analyze component properties: compositional calculator (phase en-

velope) and graphs (viscosity, mass density, molar density). When component lumping
(group components) is used you can compare results on phase envelope and graphs
before and after lumping.

• The possibility to find wells on 2D, 3D maps and Well Section is available.

• The possibility to create sub folders in object tree is available.

• The possibility to sort and manually change the order of objects in the tree is available.

• The possibility to set Well Logs loading settings (including units, palette type etc).

• Statistics is available for Well Log visualization on 3D Map.

• The possibility to add markers where the wells’ trajectories intersect a horizon.

• The possibility to do local horizon editing: pull up the horizon to the selected markers
on selected wells.

• The possibility to create grids via faults and horizons and taking into account the impact
of faults.

17.2. Model Designer 157

 20.1

17.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.2.3 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added:

• Response surfaces method is implemented (Proxy models).

• Modified Particle Swarm Optimization method is implemented (FlexiPSO).

17.4. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.2.3 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• The RFT/MDT Mismatch Table is visualized for wells and zones (layers’ groups). The
table is available in Graphs. If zones (reservoirs) are set via the keyword ZONES then
mismatches for each zone (reservoir) will be available on this tab as well.

• The possibility to save a zip-archive with a model (available in Document menu). Model
.data file and all included files will be saved in separate zip-archive. This functionality
can be used to zip the model with a lot of included folders with data and a lot of included
files.

• The visualization of OILVISCT, GASVISCT is available.

• The visualization of group hierarchy on 2D maps is available.

• The possibility to save loaded well data to tNavigator format (the keywords WELL-
TRACK, COMPDATMD).

• The new mode for time axis visualization is available for models with very small time
steps. Choose in Graphs Settings the data format – HH:MM:SS.xxx.

17.5. Compatibility with previous versions

• The format of results files has been changed. tNavigator version 4.2.2 and earlier are
not visualizing results of 4.2.3 calculation.

17.6. Licenses and License server

In tNavigator 4.2.3:

• Licensing for Reservoir Coupling option is supported (to do integrated simulation of

several models using a common group controls).

• License server can be installed with password protection.

17.3. Assisted History Matching 158

 20.1

18. tNavigator 4.2.2

18.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.2.2 kernel new options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
ST.

Calculations speed-up, accuracy settings:

• The new speed-up option WELLDENWEIGHT of the keyword RUNCTRL is available.
It reduces oscillations of wellbore mixture density, thus reducing well oscillations and
improving convergence and calculation speed. This option may be used for all models
formats.
For models in E1 and E3 format the following options are supported:
• Grid coarsening option is available (the keyword COARSEN).

• The possibility to prevent well connection pressures from falling below atmospheric
pressure is available (parameter 47 of the keyword OPTIONS).

• The actions for wells can take place after a defined time period has passed (the keyword
DELAYACT).

• Reference depth can be specified independently for each region in FIP family (the
keyword DATUMRX).

• The surface tension can be set as a function of salt and surfactant concentration in
models with salts and surfactants (keywords ESSNODE, SURFSTES).

• Special inflow equations for wells are available: Russell-Goodrich equation (R-G op-
tion) and P-P (generalized pseudo-pressure equation) (parameter 8 of the keyword WEL-
SPECS).
For models in E1 format the following options are supported:
• Total molar rate target can be used as a well control or a limit (option TMRA of the
keywords WCONPROD, WELTARG).

• Capillary pressure in systems water-oil and gas-oil can be set as functions of surface
tension (option SURFTENS of the keyword SATOPTS; keywords STOW, STOG).
For models in E3 format the following options are supported:
• Generalized pseudo pressure option is available (option GPP, parameter 5 and 6 of the
keyword PICOND).

• For compositional models Pedersen viscosity correlation is supported (keywords PED-

ERSEN, PEDTUNE, PEDTUNER).

18. tNavigator 4.2.2 159

 20.1

For models in ST format the following options are supported:

• Aquifer can be connected to the reservoir using the keyword BOTTOM.
Special options:
• VFP tables can be generated for producers via correlations (the keyword VFPCORR) in
compositional models.

• The fully implicit calculation of API is implemented (the keyword TRACEROPTS). In

the version 4.2.2 for salts and API fully implicit calculation is used by default. To use
semi-implicit calculation (default in previous versions) one need to use flag EXP in the
keyword TRACEROPTS.

• Well lists can be used (WLIST) in the second parameter of the keyword ACTIONC.

• BLOCK(x,y,z) function can be used in the keyword ARITHMETIC in sections PROPS-

SOLUTION.

• MAPAXES is taken into account when coordinates X, Y, Z are defined in BLOCK (X,
Y, Z are set in the global coordinate system).

• ARRXXX maps from previous sections can be used in the keyword ARITHMETIC.
MPI version:
• Grid coarsening option is available (the keyword COARSEN).

• Blocks from LGR can inherit rock property automatically from global grid (the keyword
LGRCOPY).

• Non-neighbor connection transmissibility values between blocks in any two grids can
be set (the keyword NNCGEN).

18.2. Model Designer

In tNavigator 4.2.2 the following features are added to Model Designer:
• Several model variants can be created.

• Calculation results of different model variants can be loaded automatically.

• Forecast model can be created; the possibility to edit forecast period and wells’ control
modes on the first forecast time step is available.

• Economical limits can be edited in the Well Properties dialogue.

• A compass and a scale are available on the visualization panel.

• Bubble maps are available on 2D maps.

18.2. Model Designer 160

 20.1

• The local grid editing is available using selected markers and radius.

• Statistics for horizons is available.

• The possibility to select the length units separately for XY and for Z is available in data
loading (RESCUE, well data).

• Polygon union operation is available.

• Filter for horizon can be used using polygon.

• Interpolation for 3D maps using VPC and selected map is available.

• 3D permeability map can be interpolated using porosity map and permeability distribu-
tion.

• Trends can be used in different interpolations of 3D maps: any property (trend property),
VPC (2D-map + trend), core data (porosity Log, porosity precision).

• The result of interpolation can be cropped using the bounds of input data.

• In Well Section logarithmic scale is available.

18.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.2.2 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added:

• Particle Swarm Optimization method is implemented (PSO).

• Differential Evolution method is optimized for a small amount of simulation launches.

Select Local to use this option. If you can launch simulator a lot of times Global can be
used.

• Optimization for NPV is available (net present value).

• Typical HM scenario is available from GUI to vary end-points arrays (SWCR, KRO
etc.). Experiments are created automatically.

• Typical HM scenario is available from GUI to vary faults’ transmissibility multipliers

(MULTFLT). Experiments are created automatically.

• The possibility to assign variable values from specific number of values (defined man-
ually) is available.

• The series of experiments can be created for different geological realizations.

18.3. Assisted History Matching 161

 20.1

18.4. Model Queue. Remote GUI

In tNavigator 4.2.2 Model Queue and Remote GUI module the following features are added:

• Model Queue is integrated with Model Designer. Calculations can run on cluster.

• The possibility to start calculation from the selected time step is available.

18.5. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.2.2 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• The visualization of surface network is available (NETWORK). Use Show Network

nodes on 2D map.

• The possibility to create Templates for Cross plots is available; for example for Hist. vs.
Calculated graphs. On Graphs Templates switch from Graphs to Crossplots.

• The regions maps (FIPNUM, SATNUM etc.) can be used as a Cut for visualization.

• The histogram for palette is available (shows the distribution of selected parameter).

• The possibility to group virtual and real well connections is available (for hydraulic
fractures). These groups are visualized in objects list and in Well Filters.

• The multipliers for units can be fixed on Graph Templates (thousands/millions).

• User defined arrays ARR can be visualized in View Results mode and they can be used
in map arithmetic command line (User Maps and User Cuts).

• Maps PINCHNUM and ENDNUM can be used in map arithmetic command line (User
Maps and User Cuts).

• In Load Well Data dialogue the date can be set in the format of number of days from
the starting date (select this option in the corresponding box).

• In Load Well Data dialogue the historical data can be applied to the previous time step
(select this option in the Units Settings tab).

• The possibility to expand/collapse all child objects in the object tree for Graphs is
available via the right mouse click on the object.

• Transmissibilities TRANX (Y,Z) are visualized and saved in the INIT file with
transmissibility multipliers applied – MULTX(Y,Z), MULTX-(Y,Z), HMMULTX(Y,Z),
HMMULTX-(Y,Z), HMMLTXY.

18.4. Model Queue. Remote GUI 162

 20.1

18.6. Compatibility with previous versions

• The format of results files has been changed. tNavigator version 4.2.1 and earlier are
not visualizing results of 4.2.2 calculation.

• To save and split the model it is necessary to check in the Settings. Models. Write
Initial Maps). Recording of initial maps is not done for default now to speed-up models’
opening on slow shared disks and to reduce the size of the folder with calculation results.

18.7. Licenses and License server

In tNavigator 4.2.2:

• Histograms of the licenses usage are available in the web interface of the license server.
For each module there is a separate histogram. It shows the percentages of time during
the indicated time period when certain number of licenses was used. 0 Licenses were
occupied during this percentage of time, 1 license – during this the percentage of time,
etc. up to N – the number of licenses of this type.

18.6. Compatibility with previous versions 163

 20.1

19. tNavigator 4.2.1

19.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.2.1 kernel new options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
ST. New option is available – VFP table generation according to the selected correlation.

Calculations speed-up, accuracy settings:

• Adaptive implicit method AIM is supported for thermal models in E3, ST format.

For models in E1 and E3 format the following options are supported:

• User defined tables UDT can be used to assign values to user defined quantities (the
following interpolation types can be used: NV, LC, LL).

• User defined quantities can be specified for well segments in UDQ keyword (for exam-
ple, SOFR etc.).

• A control or limit value for the well can be increased or decreased for the specified
value (the keyword WTADD).

• Scale deposition model: the cumulative effects of scale deposited around the well con-
nections and the resulting degradation of the productivity index due to sea water injec-
tion (keywords SCDPDIMS, SCDATAB, SCDPTAB, WSCTAB (parameters 1-3)).

• Segmented model of density calculations can be used in BRINE option (parameter 12

SEG of the keyword WELSPECS).

• The threshold pressures for flow in each direction between equilibration regions can be
different (option IRREVER of the keyword EQLOPTS).

• Non-neighbor connections across cells deactivated by MINPV can be created even if

thickness exceeds threshold value (option GAP of the 2nd parameter of the keyword
PINCH).

For models in E1 format the following options are supported:

• Gas consumption rate and gas import rate can be specified via UDQ (parameters 2 and
3 of the keyword GCONSUMP).

• The possibility to apply maximum rate at which the solution gas-oil ratio is allowed
only in blocks with free gas (option FREE 2nd parameter of the keyword DRSDT).

For models in E3 format the following options are supported:

• The possibility to modify the Stone I three-phase oil relative permeability (the keyword
STONEPAR).

19. tNavigator 4.2.1 164

 20.1

• The possibility to define each component fraction to sale or fuel (4th parameter of the
keyword GRUPSALE, GRUPFUEL).

For models in ST format the following options are supported:

• Option ISOTHERMAL can be used (energy conservation equation is not imposed in

model. As a conclusion, grid cell temperatures will not change from their specified
initial values).

Special options:

• New option is available – VFP table generation for producers according to the selected
correlation (the keyword VFPCORR). The following correlations can be used:

– PA - Petalaz & Aziz,

– HB – Hagedorn & Brown,
– O – Orkiszewski,
– G – Gray,
– AGF – Aziz,
– Govier & Fogarasi,
– MB – Mukherjee & Brill.

• An implicit calculation of passive tracer is available for black oil and compositional
models and for waters with different salinities simulation (the keyword TRACEROPTS).

• Each block can have its own primary variable for thermal models in E3 and ST format
(option MIX of the keyword TFORM). Variables are chosen automatically by tNavigator

• A new option of console version is available: --restart, it continues calculation from

input step or last calculated step if input step is not calculated.

MPI version:

• Splitting of hybrid models is available.

19.2. Model Designer

In tNavigator 4.2.1 the following features are added to Model Designer:

• Local grid refinement LGRs can be added: refinement along well trajectory, connections,
in the specified box.

• Wells’ perforations can be edited (Ctrl+click on the well or Edit Perforations on the
Well Section).

• New wells and sidetracks can be added (Alt+click on the map).

19.2. Model Designer 165

 20.1

• The possibility to create aquifers is available (set geometry and properties to Fetkovich
or Carter-Tracy aquifer).

• Historical data is visualized on Graph Templates immediately when it is loaded to the

project.

• The possibility to add well controls is available.

• The possibility to add group controls is available.

• The possibility to add economic limits for wells is available.

19.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.2.1 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added:

• An objective function can be set manually using UDQ.

• RFT measurements made before zero time step are assigned to zero time step and
compared with the initial reservoir pressure.

• A comment can be added to each new experiment in the corresponding box.

19.4. Model Queue. Remote GUI

In tNavigator 4.2.1 Model Queue and Remote GUI module the following features are added:

• For LSF queuing system the number of nodes requested by the waiting tasks is dis-
played.

• Cluster calculations are not stopped when the queue that was created in tNavigator is
closed.

19.5. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.2.1 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• The possibility to navigate quickly to the line in the model’s file in which an error or
warning occurred while reading. The transition is performed by double-clicking on the
line with the message on the panel report.

• User Cut concept have been extended. The possibility to create a cut for grid blocks
with specified map value is available.

• Visualization of parameters that are specified via the keywords ZMFVD and TEMPVD
is available in Properties option.

19.3. Assisted History Matching 166

 20.1

• The possibility to build the vertical cross sections of the model by planes parallel to the
XZ plane and YZ.

• The possibility to continue down the well trajectory in the Add well dialogue is available
via Add Point button.

• Well’s transmissibility factor can be edited in Wells Properties dialogue.

• Any graph for well and for group can we loaded to Graphs Templates using Load graphs
button.

19.6. Licenses and License server

In tNavigator 4.2.1 the following features are added to work with license::

• The possibility to use a license server for Windows (without the virtual machine). Only
the following systems are supported: 64-bit version of Windows 7, 8, 8.1, 10, Vista.

19.6. Licenses and License server 167

 20.1

20. tNavigator 4.2.0

This version is released as tNavigator 4.2.0 due to significant improvements in the GUI and
integration of simulator with the preprocessor. The Geology module was renamed as Model
Designer due to the fact that at the moment the main it’s application is creation of simulation
models for tNavigator (preprocessor). All the functionality of Geology module is available in
Model Designer now.

20.1. tNavigator kernel

In tNavigator 4.2.0 kernel new options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
ST.

Calculations speed-up, accuracy settings:

• Speed-up of black oil and compositional models calculations using AIM method. For
compositional models AIM is used by default.

For models in E1 and E3 format the following options are supported:

• Coal Bed Methane Model can be used (keywords COAL, COALNUM, DIFF-
COAL, LANGMUIR, ROCKDEN, GASCONC, LANGMEXT, DIFFCBM, RESORB,
GASSATC).

• Relative permeability of the injected phase can be defaulted (parameter 6 of the keyword
COMPINJK).

• Minimum time interval between well priority calculations can be specified (parameter 1
of the keyword PRIORITY).

• The possibility to choose if the time steps are controlled to coincide exactly with the
on/off cycling times of the well (parameter 6 of the keyword WCYCLE).

• Rescaling of saturations at wells connections can be used (keyword COMPRP).

• Segment number to allocate to all connections within the specified range can be set
(parameter 11 of the keyword COMPSEGS, COMPSEGL).

• A segment of multi-segment well can be defined to represent a flow limiting valve

(keyword WSEGFLIM).

• Low salinity option can be used: the oil and water RP and the water-oil capillary
pressure are functions of the salt concentration (keywords LOWSALT, LSALTFNC,
LWSLTNUM).

• The cubes can be imported to the global grid via the keyword IMPORT (option UN-
FORMATTED).

20. tNavigator 4.2.0 168

 20.1

• Speed-up in opening models with a large number of local grid refinements (>10000).

• Well’s connections can be specified via the keyword WELLCOMP (parameters 1-9,
11-12). This keyword is analogue of the keyword COMPDAT.

• Producer’s control mode can be specified via the keyword WELLPROD (parameters
1-14). This keyword is analogue of the keyword WCONPROD.

• Group limits and targets can be specified via the keyword GRUPPROD (parameters
1-8). This keyword is analogue of the keyword GCONPROD.

For models in E1 format the following options are supported:

• Mixing of waters with different salinities BRINE can be used with ASP option (injection
of polymer-alkaline-surfactant) (keywords SALTNODE, PLYVISCS).

For models in E3 format the following options are supported:

• An injection mixture by order can be specified (keyword WINJORD).

• The data to maintain the average pressure in a particular pressure maintenance region at
a specified target can be specified (keyword GPMAINT3).

• Drainage option can be used in hysteresis (keyword DRAINAGE).

• Equation of state number can be specified for each separator stage (8th parameter of
FIELDSEP, 9th parameter of FIPSEP, 10th parameter of SEPCOND).

• An alternative model for capillary number calculations is supported in velocity depen-

dent RP (5th parameter of VELDEP).

• Forchheimer model for connection D-factor calculations is supported in velocity depen-

dent RP (4th parameter of VELDEP).

• Recovery plant table can be specified for compositional models (keyword RECOVERY).

• Minimal and maximal reservoir temperature can be specified for thermal models (key-
word TRANGE).

• Numerical model for heat loss can be used in thermal models (option N in 6th parameter
of the keyword ROCKPROP).

• The molar composition of the injected fluid can be defined as a mixture (option MIX of
the keyword WELLINJE).

For models in ST format the following options are supported:

• Minimal and maximal reservoir temperature can be specified (keywords MINTEMP,

MAXTEMP).

20.1. tNavigator kernel 169

 20.1

Special options:

• Maximum rate of increase of solution gas-oil ratio as a function of pressure can be

specified (only in black-oil models) (keyword DRSDTVP).

• An alternative model of gas dissolution that takes into account the exponential nature of
the system relaxation can be used (only in black-oil models) (keyword DRSDTVPE).

• Possibility to use Corey (LET) correlation only for RP and define capillary pressure
via table (in this case one should enter 0 in parameter 12 (power) of the keyword
COREYWO, COREYGO (LETWO, LETGO) and define tables SWOF, SGOF or other.
Values for capillary pressure will be taken from tables and RP will be calculated using
Corey (LET) correlation.

• Possibility to define EGRID for grid visualization (keyword VISGRID). This option is
used for models with unstructured grids.

In MPI version:

• Hybrid models are supported (model in E1 or E3 format, well data in MO format).

Input output data, Export Results:

• in SUMMARY section the following parameters can be used:

1. output of fluids-in-place at surface (separator) conditions or reservoir conditions

SFIP, RFIP (.UNRST-file);
2. liquid and vapor mole fractions for wells, groups, field: FXMF, FYMF, FZMF,
GXMF, GYMF, GZMF (.UNSMRY-file).

20.2. Model Designer

In tNavigator 4.2.0 the following features are added to Model Designer:

• Integration of the simulator with Model Designer.

• Option Definitions is available.

• The possibility to open additional windows with the functionality of the main window.

• The possibility to load well data (events and history) in schedule format.

• The detailed information of component grouping (lumping) for compositional models is

available.

• Well filter is available.

• The possibility to create well groups.

20.2. Model Designer 170

 20.1

• The possibility to add the following cubes:

1. RP end-point scaling (swcr, sgcr, sowcr, sogcr, swu, sgu, swl, sgl, swlpc, kro, krw,
krg, krwr, krgr, krorw, krorg, pcw, pcg);
2. new fluid-in-place (FIP) regions FIPXXX;
3. cubes to work with the pore volume (MINPVV, MULTPV).

20.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.2.0 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added:

• Integration with Model Designer: the possibility to create automatically basic variables
(RP end-points specified via Corey correlation (COREYWO, COREYGO) and contact
depths (EQUIL)).

20.4. Model Queue. Remote GUI

In tNavigator 4.2.0 Model Queue and Remote GUI module the following features are added:

• Queuing system SLURM is supported.

• Visualization of cluster queues load (output of the number of occupied nodes).

• The possibility to reassign job to another cluster queue (if the job has not started yet).

• The possibility to send jobs automatically to multiple cluster queues.

• The possibility to close tNavigator when the local queue is completed.

20.5. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.2.0 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• The possibility to hide some of the options.

• The possibility to choose the map visualization type: 3D, 2D, Histogram.

• The possibility to use the grid size up to 10x10 windows in Graphs Templates.

• In Load Well Data dialogue the column preview of selected files is available (for history
and perforations).

• Visualization for multi-segment wells is available: segments structure in the form of a

tree and graphs of total parameters for segments.

• For compositional models graphs are grouped by components, component injection

graphs for wells and groups are available.

20.3. Assisted History Matching 171

 20.1

• The possibility to view and modify the parameters of the simulator’s iteration process
(keyword RUNCTRL) from the GUI in Document. Simulator options dialogue. Changes
may be done in sections RUNSPEC (global settings) and SCHEDULE (settings for the
individual time steps).

20.6. Licenses and License server

In tNavigator 4.2.0 the following features are added to work with license:

• The possibility to reinstall the license during the calculation in the GUI version.

• The possibility to use a new format of license: a hybrid license based on usb-device and
file with the license information that allows to change the number and the duration time
of license without changing the USB key, just changing the file.

• Simplified reference to the license can be used:

http://<license>/tNavigator<group_id> or http://<license>/tnavigator<group_id>, where
<license> – IP address of the license server or DNS name, and <group_id> – number of
license group.

In tNavigator 4.2.0 the license server can be administered using the web-interface:

• The license file can be loaded using the web-interface.

• Server log-file can be viewed using the web-interface.

• Web-interface is available via the simplified license references:

http://<license>/tNavigator or http://<license>/tnavigator, where <license> – IP address
of the license server or DNS name.

20.6. Licenses and License server 172

 20.1

21. tNavigator 4.1.3

21.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.1.3 kernel new options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
IM, ST, MO.

Calculations speed-up, accuracy settings:

• Speed-up in calculations of thermal models having a water zone (option WATERZONE

in the keyword RUNCTRL is used for default for compositional and thermal models).

• The water molar concentration in water zone can be excluded for compositional models
if WATERZONE option is used (is used by default).

• The possibility to switch on/off WATERZONE option in the SCHEDULE section via
the keyword RUNCTRL.

• The main variable (the last hydrocarbon component) can be excluded for thermal models
via the option INCVCE 0 in the keyword RUNCTRL (is used by default).

For models in E1 and E3 format the following options are supported:

• Well friction can be taken into account in the well bore (keywords WFRICTN,
WFRICTNL, WFRICSEG, WFRICSGL).

• The method (implicit or explicit) of VFP table interpolation for the well can be chosen
(2nd parameter of the keyword WVFPEXP).

• The minimum group potential rates for a new drilling can be specified (GDRILPOT).

• Minimum and maximum permitted sales gas production rate can be specified (parameter
3-5 of the keyword GCONSALE).

• The possibility to stop the run at the next report time step in case if the well is shut or
stopped for any reason after being opened (parameter 8 of the keyword WECON).

• The fixed pressure drops between network node and well’s THP can be specified
(WNETDP).

• Grid block permeabilities can be averaged when the interblock transmissibilities are
calculated (PERMAVE).

• Block center method can be used in transmissibility calculations (OLDTRAN).

• The depths of the middle of each grid block can be specified (MIDS).

• The surface tension can be defined as a function of pressure (STVP) for the MISCIBLE
option.

21. tNavigator 4.1.3 173

 20.1

For models in E3 format the following options are supported:

• Water wet hysteresis models are supported (Jargon model) (values 8 and 9 in the 2nd
parameter of the keyword EHYSTR).
• WAG hysteresis model can be used (parameters 1-3, 5-8 of the keyword WAGHYSTR).
For models in MO format the following options are supported:
• Lower watercut, gas-oil ratio and other lower limits can be used for wells (PLIM).
For models in ST format the following options are supported:
• Heater wells can be specified (HTWELL, HTWRATE, HTWRATEPL, HTWTEMP,
HTWI).
• The reaction rate temperature-dependence factor with multiple activation energy values
can be specified (EACT_TAB).
For models in IM and ST format the following options are supported:
• Fracture volume fraction and the rock-in-fracture fraction can be specified for dual
porosity models (FRFRAC, FORMINFRAC).
• The multipliers for geometric grid block volume can be specified (VOLMOD).
In MPI version:
• The hydraulic fractures can be specified using the keyword COMPFRAC.
• Models with geometry DX/DY/DZ can be used.
Special options:
• LET correlation can be used for relative permeabilities in E1 and E3 format models
(keywords LETWO, LETGO)
• The length of perforated interval can be set in specified grid block in E1 and E3 format
models (COMPVAL).
• Lower economic limits can be set for watercut, gas-oil ratio, water-gas ratio and gas-
liquid ratio in E1 and E3 format models (negative values should be specified in the
keyword WECON parameters 4-6, 13).
Input output data, Export Results:
• in SUMMARY section the following parameters can be used:
1. inter-region phase flow total (ROFT, RGFT, RWFT);
2. salt, polymer, alkaline and other tracer concentrations (WTIC, WTPC, WTIR,
WTPR, WTIT, WTPT, WCIC, WSIC, WTICALK, WTICSUR);
3. data for well segments (SOFR, SGFR, SWFR, SPR, SPRD, SPRDH, SPRDF,
SPRDA, SWFV, SOFV, SGFV, SWHF, SOHF, SGHF, SLPR, SWCT, SGOR,
SOGR, SGWR, SWGR, SOWR, SWOR, SLGR, SGLR).

21.1. tNavigator kernel 174

 20.1

21.2. Geology
In tNavigator 4.1.3 the following features are added to Geology module:
• the possibility to load grids, faults and wells from rescue files;

• dual porosity support;

• calculations of resources for black oil models;

• the possibility to load PVT and RP data in E1 syntax;

• the possibility to load well data in SCHEDULE format;

• the possibility to load component properties for compositional models in E3 syntax;

• component grouping (lumping) for compositional models;

• maps visualization on Well Section;

• the possibility to edit fault transmissibility in GUI;

• 2D map visualization;

• possibility to run simulation model directly from Geology without opening it in separate
window in tNavigator, with maps and graphs available in Geology;

• visualization of contour lines on 2D maps;

• Statistics button for 2D maps;

• the possibility to measure distances on 2D and 3D maps;

• the possibility to create and edit sections;

• streamlines visualization.

21.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.1.3 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added:
• the possibility to use RFT data in history matching;

• the possibility to normalize objective function by object (wells, groups) number and
parameter (rates, totals, pressure) number;

• calculation of P10-P50-P90 and any other P-quantiles for parameters that are selected
by user;

• the possibility to merge several history matching projects, created for the same model
with the same set of variables but with different calculated experiments.

21.2. Geology 175

 20.1

21.4. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.1.3 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• visualization of LET correlation data for relative permeabilities;

• new interface for visualization of Corey correlation (RP) and Standing correlation
(PVT);

• the possibility to cancel the last action in Map Editing (Ctrl+Z);

• visualization of resources maps for compositional models;

• visualization of resources calculation progress;

• visualization of VFP tables;

• visualization of hysteresis;

• the possibility to import several User Maps simultaneously;

• visualization of component number in Information option;

• visualization of graphs for well segments;

• new arithmetic functions for maps are available in User Maps and User Graphs: column
operations (min_2d (minimum), max_2d (maximum), avg_2d (average), sum_2d (sum));

• in Graph Templates:

1. the possibility to visualize graphs for months and years;

2. the possibility to select the range (for time steps) of graph visualization.

21.5. Licenses and License server

In tNavigator 4.1.3 the following features are added:

• visualization of the license server status and usb-key data in the "License details".

21.4. Graphical User Interface 176

 20.1

22. tNavigator 4.1.2

22.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.1.2 kernel new options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
IM, ST, MO.

Calculations speed-up, accuracy settings:

• Speed-up of compositional models calculations. For black oil and compositional models
AIM option is supported (beta version).
By default the fully implicit method is used; the adaptive implicit method may be
included as an option AIM of the keyword RUNCTRL.

• Speed-up in calculations of models having a water zone (water saturation in the grid
block is equal to 1). The option can be included as WATERZONE in the keyword
RUNCTRL (is used by default for compositional models).

For models in E1 and E3 format the following options are supported:

• The well can be closed during drilling and workovers in case of automatic drilling of
new wells. It will be opened in a specified number of days taken to drill it (parameter 3
of the keyword WDRILTIM).

• The iteration parameters for multi-segment wells can be specified (parameter 1 of the
keyword WSEGITER).

• The well can be opened if it was closed because of GROUP or FIELD limits violation
(option G in the keyword WTEST).

• The number of FIP region can be specified, that will be used in the calculations of the
well rate in reservoir conditions (parameter 13 of the keyword WELSPECS).

• Well rate can be controlled by the gas-oil ratio (keyword WGORPEN).

• The well startup time and maximum timestep length, at which the well is turned on by
automatic cycling (parameters 4 and 5 of the keyword WCYCLE).

• Maximum number of wells on artificial lift (ALQ) in the group can be specified (pa-
rameter 3 of the keyword GLIFTLIM).

• Parameters for reinjection or voidage replacement can be specified (parameters 7-8 of

the keyword WCONINJ).

• The dynamic changing of fixed pressures can be used (keyword GNETDP).

• In the keywords OPERATE, OPERATER operations ABS, MULTIPLY can be used.

22. tNavigator 4.1.2 177

 20.1

• In the keyword OPTIONS the 117th option can be used:

Value 1 – the map MULTNUM should be specified both for matrix and fracture;
Value >= 2 – maps MULTNUM, FLUXNUM, PINCHNUM, OPERNUM should be
specified both for matrix and fracture.

• If NTG is used in the arithmetic (ADD, MULTIPLY, ...) non-specified values are re-
placed by 1.

For models in E3 format the following options are supported:

• The availability of injection fluids can be taken into account in injection rate calculations
(keyword WAVAILIM).

• Economic limits for production wells can be specified for component mole fractions
(keyword WECONCMF).

• For compositional models hysteresis of RP and capillary pressures can be used with the
option MISCIBLE.

• The makeup gas can be used for injection (parameter 4 of the keywords WINJGAS and
GINJGAS).

• Modifications of the map MULTPV in EDIT section via arithmetic (ADD, MULTIPLY,
...) is ignored to reproduce the behavior of E3.

For models in E1 format the following options are supported:

• For multisegment wells the segment external source or sink can be specified (keyword
WSEGEXSS).

• Sales gas production rate target can be specified for groups (parameters 1 and 2 of the
keyword GCONSALE).

For models in MO format the following options are supported:

• Parameters for reinjection or voidage replacement can be specified: GVRT, GWRT,

GGRT, VREP, RECYcle.

For models in ST format the following options are supported:

• The option SEGREGATED can be used to calculate phase resources and phase rates in
surface conditions (keyword SURFLASH)

• The bubble point pressure at initial temperature at each block for specified component
can be specified (keyword PBC).

• The following models are supported: Linear Elastic, Nonlinear Elastic, Dilation-
Recompaction (keywords PORMAX, CPORPD, PBASE, PRPOR, POR, CPEPAC,
PDILA, CRD, PORRATMAX, PPACT, FR).

22.1. tNavigator kernel 178

 20.1

For models in IM and ST format the following options are supported:

• Fracture blocks of global grid can be deactivated if any one of the following conditions
is satisfied:
DIFRAC = DJFRAC = DKFRAC = 0
PINCHOUTARRAY = 0
PERMI = PERMJ = PERMK =0

In MPI version:

• The possibility of streamlines calculation is added.

• The keyword MINP (Minimal Pore Volume Tolerance) is supported for MO format
models.

• Full support of the keyword COPYBOX. Input and output BOXes can be used with
different Z-coordinates.

Special options:

• For models in format E1 and E3 economic limits can be specified in user-defined way
for wells (WECONX) and for groups (GECONX), also UDQ can be used.

• The following options of the keyword TNAVCTRL are added:

DPGRID_PRE2014 > 0 – switch off the copying of NTG values from matrix to fracture
blocks (if the values are not specified) in dual porosity models for E3 format;
SWCR_CORR: 1, 2 or 3 – adjustment of SWCR in blocks using SWU, SWL.

• The special permeability value used for JFUNC computation can be specified for E1
and E3 format models (the keyword JFPERM). If this value is specified for block, than
the 6th parameter of JFUNC (JFUNCR) is ignored).

22.2. Geology
In tNavigator 4.1.2 the following features are added to Geology module:

• operations with maps and horizons: rotation and movement;

• the possibility to load horizons in binary format (GRDB);

• the possibility to create horizons via point set;

• the possibility to construct Vertical Proportional Curves for cubes;

• histograms;

• the possibility to create a grid with unstructured faults.

22.2. Geology 179

 20.1

22.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.1.2 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added:
• calculation of P10-P50-P90 for parameters that are selected by user;

• the possibility to set the periods of recorded map and graph data when the job is added
to queue.

22.4. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.1.2 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:
• the possibility to load RFT pressures, automatic calculation of corresponding reservoir
pressure;

• visualizations of graphs for surface network (if the keyword NETWORK is used);

• visualizations of graphs for SEMI-ANALYTICAL aquifers;

• visualizations of Drainage Network on 2D maps (connection between producers and

injectors);

• the possibility to fill contour lines with different colors (2D maps);

• In Graph Templates:

1. visualization of user-defined UDQ;

2. the possibility to sum graphs for components;
3. the possibility to rename the axis.

22.5. Compatibility with previous versions

Extended possibilities of calculation results storage. To view the calculations results of version
4.1.2 use only the GUI version 4.1.2.

22.6. License server

In tNavigator 4.1.2 licence server:
• The support of systemd for RHEL 7 compatible with Linux-distributive is added.

• The support of Apache 2.3/2.4 is added.

• The possibility to reserve licenses for cluster version with the utility tNavigator License
Status is added.

• Settings for automatic rotation of server logs are added.

22.3. Assisted History Matching 180

 20.1

• All kinds of statistics take into account the setting of output IP/Hostname.

• Exterior JavaScript libraries (jQuery and plug-ins) that are used in the web-interface
have been updated.

22.6. License server 181

 20.1

23. tNavigator 4.1.1

23.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.1.1 kernel new options are supported for the following model formats: E1, E3,
IM, ST.

For models in E1 and E3 format the following options are supported:

• Maximum gas-liquid ratio (GLR) can be specified as an economic limit (parameter 13

of the keyword WECON).

• The guide rate can be set at the beginning of each timestep equal to the group’s net
voidage rate (net voidage rate is equal to the voidage production rate minus the reservoir
volume injection rate of any other phases) – option NETV of the keyword GCONINJE
(parameter 10).

• Maximum rate of change of guide rate for wells under group control can be specified
(the keyword DGRDT).

• A group can be set whose rate target the automatic choke attempts to match by adjusting
the pressure drop across it (parameter 5 of the keyword NODEPROP).

• The well can be closed if it is found to be operating on the stabilized part of its VFP
curve (parameter 3 of the keyword WVFPEXP).

• Voidage mobility for injectors can be set (keywords COMPMOBI, COMPMBIL).

• Well priority numbers can be set for the wells under group control (keyword WELPRI).

• A segment of multi-segment well that represents a sub-critical valve can be defined

(keyword WSEGVALV).

• Pore volume multipliers (MULTPV) can be used in SCHEDULE section.

For models in E3 format the following options are supported:

• Advance import gas can be assigned to a group supplying gas for reinjection (keyword
GADVANCE).

• Mixture injection can be used (keyword WINJMIX and MIX option of the keywords
WINJGAS, GINJGAS).

• WAG (water and gas) cycle types can be used: M – months and Y – years in the keyword
WELLWAG.

• Pressure maintenance regions can be specified (keyword PMANUM).

23. tNavigator 4.1.1 182

 20.1

• The availability of injection fluids can be taken into account when calculating injection
rates (keyword WAVAILIM).
For models in E1 format the following options are supported:
• Maximum rate of increase of vapor oil-gas ratio (OGR) can be set (keyword DRVDT).
For models in ST format the following options are supported:
• Initial distribution can be set from the conditions of hydrostatic equilibrium (VERTI-
CAL) in conjunction with initial phase saturations (SW, SO, SG).

• Default parameter values are supported for analytical aquifers (AQPROP).

• Default parameter values are supported for injection enthalpy calculations.

• The SEMI-ANALYTICAL aquifer model can be used.

• Multiple viscosity regions can be set (keywords VISCTYPE, VSTYPE).

• Multiplies for a well operating targets or limits can be used (keyword WTMULT).
For models in IM, ST format the following options are supported:
• Unweighted injectors. Injected fluid mobility should be part of a well index (keyword
*UNWEIGHTED INJECTOR).
Input output data, Export Results
• Multout mode is supported for export results in E1/E3 format.

• The size of file with calculated maps has been optimized.

• Parameter ALLPROPS of the keyword RPTRST is supported.

23.2. Geology
In tNavigator 4.1.1 the following features are added to Geology module:
• Discrete interpolation in arithmetic is available.

• New objects are available: a point set and multi-valued horizons. For them the following
features are supported:

1. The point set can be loaded from a text file.

2. The point set can be created via horizons.

• New tools can be used to navigate through operations with objects.

• A new object "selector" is available for the convenience of working with the well
section.

23.2. Geology 183

 20.1

• A step-by-step update of calculated objects has been implemented that is convenient for
long calculations: horizon interpolation and automatic markers correlation.
• A creation of new objects from the object tree is available.
• The calculation cancellation can be used.
• The area of grid editing can be calculated via a single point with a radius.
• Construction of geological grid with faults:
1. An algorithm to "pull" grid lines to the fault has been optimized: the method of
"dual" grid.
2. An integration of faults of arbitrary shape, which don’t violate a system of genera-
tors of the grid, has been implemented. The method of "draft-horizon" is used. The
establishment of correspondence between the connected components is used for
fault intersections with core horizon and horizons of each connected component.
• Tools for working with faults:
1. A group of faults can be built with the addition of structural and non-structural
faults.
2. Faults can be limited in height.
3. Faults can be constructed from the set of points or from the several surfaces.
4. Automatic processing of faults intersection is available.
• Horizons interpolation by markers or point sets, taking into account the faults of arbitrary
shape, is available.

23.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.1.1 Assisted History Matching module the following features were added:
• the ability to specify manually the values of the variables;
• the ability to remove the experiment;
• the log-normal distribution of parameter.

23.4. Remote GUI

In tNavigator 4.1.1 Remote GUI module the following features were added:
• the possibility to run different versions of tNavigator from GUI;
• the possibility to do forced-ending of dangling tasks;
• the messages on the log panel are sorted by their type.

23.3. Assisted History Matching 184

 20.1

23.5. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.1.1 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:
• Axis are available in the compositional calculator.

• Visualization of the time of flight of fluid particle on streamlines on 2D and 3D maps

(uncheck "Show mesh" to see the streamlines).

• In Graphs Templates:

1. The possibility to synchronize time axes is available;

2. The possibility to create a screen shot is available;
3. The possibility to print to the printer is available;
4. The possibility to save in the vector format is available;
5. Automatic check for not saved template is performed.

• In Create Forecast dialogue:

1. The possibility to set THP control mode for producers is available;

2. The possibility to set Drawdown control mode for producers is available;
3. The possibility to set different control modes for water and gas injectors is avail-
able.

• In Well properties dialogue:

1. The possibility to set Drawdown control mode for producers is available;

2. Maximum gas-liquid ratio can be set as economic limit.

• Well trajectories can be loaded (Load Well Data dialogue) in the units different from
the model units.

• Drawdown graph is visualized.

• The current connection status (open, closed, not specified) is visualized.

• Virtual connections created via hydraulic fracture are visualized in the connection list.

• The thickness of the contour lines and the size of the text can be set.

• In the mode "View Large Model":

1. The possibility to see Initial maps is available;

2. User Cuts are available;
3. Well filters are available;
4. Automatic model coarsening is done for viewing speed-up.

23.5. Graphical User Interface 185

 20.1

23.6. Compatibility with previous versions

Support for 32-bit Linux systems is no longer available (including the license server).

23.7. License server

In tNavigator 4.1.1 license server:

• Only 64-bit Linux-systems are supported.

• tNavigator versions below 4.0 are no longer supported.

• A new format of licenses is available: a hybrid license based on usb-devices and file
with the license information that allows to change the number and the duration time of
licenses without changing the USB key, just changing the file.

• For hybrid license a "hot-swap" of file with the license information is available.

• A fault-tolerance has been improved: tNavigator access keys are provided for 24 hours
in case of errors in interaction with usb-device (assuming the smooth operation for 48
hours before the error).

• E-mail notifications of the licencing-period termination or of error interaction with the

usb-device can be configured.

• A page with information about the version of the server and the connected usb license
device is available.

• The basic Apache authentication has been supported, which allows to set the input
username and password for access to the license server.

• On the page with the licenses that are currently being used, information about tNavigator
versions is available.

• In the log files the time periods have been added.

• The spaces in the module names in the files of Open IT Statistics have been removed.

23.6. Compatibility with previous versions 186

 20.1

24. tNavigator 4.1.0

24.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.1.0 kernel compositional thermal models in ST format are supported. New
options are supported for formats: IM, E1 and E3.

For models in ST format the following options were supported:

• K-values for hydrocarbon components in the GAS-OIL system can be set via tables
(keywords GASLIQKV, KVTABLIM, KVTABLE) or via five coefficients in the cor-
relation formula (keywords KV1, KV2, KV3, KV4, KV5). Optional specification of
K-values for hydrocarbon component for calculating phase equilibrium in surface con-
ditions (K_SURF) is available. For water component the internal correlation is used to
calculate the equilibrium in the GAS-WATER system.

• Liquid phases individual component densities (in WATER, OIL) can be set as a func-
tions of pressure and temperature (keywords MOLDEN, MASSDEN, MOLVOL, CP,
CT1, CT2, CPT). The inner correlation formula is used if for water component if all
parameters specified via the keywords MOLDEN/MOLVOL CP, CT1, CT2, CPT, are
zero. Gas Z-factor is used to calculate GAS phase density. This factor is calculated form
the cubic Redlich-Kwong equation of state with zero Binary interaction coefficients.
The re-calculation of gas Z-factor is done at each Newton iteration (GASD-ZCOEF
(IMPLICIT)). The densities of the individual solid components are set as functions of
pressure and temperature (SOLID_DEN).

• Liquid phases individual component viscosities (in WATER, OIL) can be set as functions
of temperature (or temperature and pressure) via the tables (keywords VISCTABLE,
ATPRES), or via the correlation formula (AVISC, BVISC). The option of non-linear
mixing is supported for OIL viscosity (keywords VSMIXCOMP, VSMIXENDP, VS-
MIXFUNC). Component individual viscosities in the GAS phase can be set via the
correlation formula (AVG, BVG).

• Enthalpies of hydrocarbon components in the OIL and GAS phases can be set as func-
tions of temperature (keywords CPG1, CPG2, CPG3, CPG4, CPL1, CPL2, CPL3, CPL4,
HVAPR). The possibility to set the enthalpy of vaporization for the hydrocarbon compo-
nents as a function of temperature (HVR, EV). The internal tables are used to calculate
the enthalpy of the water component in the GAS and WATER phases, in this case the en-
thalpies of the water component are the functions of both temperature and pressure. The
enthalpies of solid components in the solid phase can be set as functions of temperature
(SOLID_CP). The rock enthalpy can be set as a function of temperature (ROCKCP).

• The SIMPLE model of thermal conductivity has been added (THCONMIX), which
allows to take into account thermal conductivity of the mobile phases (THCONW,
THCONO, THCONG), the thermal conductivity of the solid phase (THCONS), and
the rock conductivity (THCONR).

24. tNavigator 4.1.0 187

 20.1

• Porosity dependence on temperature and pressure can be defined (keywords PRPOR,

CPOR, CTPOR, CPTPOR).

• The analytical model of heat loss between the reservoir and surroundings is now avalil-
able (keywords HLOSSPROP, HLOSST, HLOSSTDIFF).

• Fetkovich and Carter-Tracy aquifers are supported (keywords AQUIFER, AQMETHOD,

AQPROP, AQLEAK).

• Two heater models are supported in Heater simulation: Heater with constant energy in-
jection rate and Heater with energy injection rate that depends on temperature difference
between the block and the heater (keywords HEATR, TMPSET, UHTR).

• Chemical reactions simulation is now available (keywords EACT, O2PP, STOREAC,

STOPROD, FREQFAC, FREQFACP, RENTH, RPHASE, RORDER, RTEMUPR,
RTEMLOWR, RXCRITCON).

• Initial conditions: initial conditions can be either calculated from hydrostatic equilib-
rium conditions or set explicitly (keywords PRES, TEMP, SW, SO, SG, MFRAC_OIL,
MFRAC_GAS).

• It is possible to define different thermal primary variables of the filtration problem

(energy density or temperature) (TFORM (ZH | ZT)).

• Dual porosity/dual permeability models have been added (keywords DUALPOR, DU-
ALPERM).

For models in E3 format the following options are supported:

• Heater simulation: Heater with constant energy injection rate, Heater with energy den-
sity dependent injection rate and Heater with energy injection rate that depends on
temperature difference between the block and the heater (HEATER).

• Matrix to fracture thermal conductivity for dual porosity models can be set explicitly
(THCONMF).

• Liquid and solid phases thermal conductivities can be defined now (THCROCK,
THCOIL, THCGAS, THCWATER, THCSOLID).

• The logics of single-porosity regions support in dual porosity models has been changed
(keyword DPNUM). In single porosity blocks the data specified for matrix blocks is
used.

• Wet gas rate limit is now available (parameter WGRA in the keywords GCONPROD,
GCONPRI, GRUPTARG.

• The stage of the separator which defines the fluid composition and limit for injection
can be set (5th parameter of GINJGAS).

24.1. tNavigator kernel 188

 20.1

• The order in which fuel, sales and re-injection gas are takes from production gas steam
can be provided now (WTAKEGAS).

• Molecular diffusion option has been added (keywords DIFFUSE, DIFFCGAS, DIFF-
COIL).

• The coefficients for LBC correlation and reference surface tension in MISCIBLE option
now can be set for each region (LBCCOEFR, MISCSTRR).

• Velocity dependent relative permeabilities have been added (keywords VELDEP, VD-
KRO, VDKRO).

• The supply of advance import gas can be assigned to a group that provides gas for
re-injection (GADVANCE).

For models in E1 and E3 format the following options are supported:

• Injection network is now available (GNETINJE) as well as convergence parameters

specification for network option (parameters 2-4 of the keyword NETBALAN);

• Gas Field Model. The calculation of the gas Daily Contracted Quantity has been added
(DCQ): keywords DCQDEFN, GASBEGIN, GASEND, GASFIELD, GASMONTH,
GASPERIO, GASYEAR, GDCQ, GDCQECON, GSWINGF, SWINGFAC;

• Killough’s Hysteresis Model used for the non-wetting gas and water phases and the wet-
ting oil phase is now available (value 7 in the 2nd parameter of the keyword EHYSTR);

• The reading of CORNERS format grid geometry from the GRID file is improved for
the case when inactive block data is adsent;

• The compatibility for the names of groups and wells is improved (the first 8 significant
characters are supported).

For models in MO format the following options are supported:

• keywords X-DI, Y-DI, TUBI, LONG and PACK formats (VFPPROD);

• improvement of FIELD units support.

In MPI version:

• loading giant models: requirements for RAM are reduced;

• models in IM and ST formats can be calculated in MPI version.

24.1. tNavigator kernel 189

 20.1

24.2. Geology
In tNavigator 4.1.0 the following features are added to Geology module kernel:
• construction of three-dimensional geological grids with faults (the faults, specified via
ruled surfaces, are supported);
• automatic correlation of well data (selection of markers from curves), a simple option;
• faulted model export: the keywords THPRES, FAULTS, MULTFLT, THPRESFT;
• in the BLOCK function in arithmetic the dual porosity is supported;
• option of discrete cubes interpolation;
• option of loading cubes.
In tNavigator 4.1.0 the following features are added to Geology module GUI:
• acceleration of 2d-maps visualization;
• dual porosity model manual 3d-map editing (GUI);
• the 3d-visualization of connections that are specified on trajectories (without considering
the time).

24.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.1.0 Assisted History Matching module the following features were added:
• parallel run of multiple versions of the differential evolution algorithm;
• a quick comparison of several similar models without adding variables to the model;
• loading history of average reservoir pressure;
• the possibility to use arithmetic expressions with variables instead of variables in MO
models (and in hybrid models in the RECU section);
• analysis for any set of parameters;
• the possibility to use the constants e and π to set variable value and limits.
For model queue the following features were added:
• an external API is made to run the simulator;
• the possibility of limiting the number of tasks on the cluster;
• saving of job queues to files that can be transferred between computers;
• view log of model calculation (monitor job) after completing the task in a normal queue
(similarly, as Show Log in Remote GUI manager);
• the possibility to limit task calculation time in the queue.

24.2. Geology 190

 20.1

24.4. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.1.0 Graphical User Interface the following features were added:

• The compositional calculator that provides the phase analysis of fluids, allows to find
bubble point pressure and the dew points pressure.

• Graph Templates:

1. The graph may be pinned (the pinned graph doesn’t change when the selected
objects are changed).
2. It’s possible to distribute different objects graphs automatically to different panels.
3. The undo option (Ctrl+Z)
4. Graphs Templates Options dialogue is improved (You can edit the settings of all
graphs and template settings in one dialog.)
5. Well lists are availble in templates.
6. Sum and average are available for graphs of various objects.
7. It’s possible to set the difference with the base model (Right mouse click on the
model name and select "Set as reference model").
8. Search option for objects, graphs and templates is improved (search now finds
everything that contains as substring all words typed by the user).
9. Possibility to reorder templates by dragging them with the mouse.
10. Back lighting of current panel graph names during editing.
11. The support of compositional models is improved (the list of components and
separator stages is added).
12. The parameter list can be displayed as a tree for quick search when editing.

• GUI:

1. Each model is run in a separate process to increase the stability in case of the
emergency termination of one of the calculation processes.
2. The Log panel is improved (the possibility to hide the Log panel and to display
information about the number of messages in different categories).
3. Export of the well trajectories to a file via the keyword WELLTRACK (columns:
X, Y, Z, Measured Depth) on the "Well Profile".
4. An option "Draw Trajectories Projections" is added on 2d maps. If you choose
this option the well trajectory projection to the selected map will be shown (if the
trajectory is set).
5. The well efficiency factor can be edited in "Well properties" dialogue (Economic
Limits tab).

24.4. Graphical User Interface 191

 20.1

6. In "Load Well Data" option the possibility to upload files with a hierarchy of well
groups is supported. Reload the model to apply the changes.

• Large models. For models, calculated on a cluster with full results export, it is possible
to see 3D maps on computers with limited RAM. Open the model via "View Large
Model" option (in the main tNavigator window). Features:

1. Visualization of cubes exported using the keyword RPTRST.

2. Visualization of wells: the current status in shown.
3. Visualization of streamlines exported using an option of the command line –ecl-sln.
4. Possibility to show I, J, K sections.
5. Loading data progress bar.

24.5. Compatibility with previous versions

It’s impossible to create a forecast in the current version 4.1.0 for models with hydraulic
fractures (keywords WFRACP, COMPFRAC) if the calculation of base model was made in
the previous version 4.0.4 or earlier. For correct results, please recalculate the base model in
4.1.0.

24.5. Compatibility with previous versions 192

 20.1

25. tNavigator 4.0.4

25.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.0.4 kernel the following options are supported:

1. For models in E1 and E3 format alkaline injection is supported. The following key-
words can be used: ALKALINE, ALKADS, ALSURFAD, ALPOLADS, ALSURFST,
WALKALIN.
2. For models in E1 and E3 format surfactant injection is supported. The following
keywords can be used: SURFACT, SURF, SURFADS, SURFROCK, SURFST, SUR-
FCAPD, SURFVISC, WSURFACT.
3. For models in E1 and E3 format polymer injection is supported. The following key-
words can be used: POLYMER, SPOLY, PLYADS, PLYROCK, PLYVISC, PLYMAX,
PLMIXPAR, PLYSHEAR, WPOLYMER.
4. For models in E1 and E3 the following options are supported
• an option TRANPORV of the keyword PETOPTS;
• operations CON, CON+, WELL for group productions limits in the keywords
GCONPROD, GCONPRI;
• the keyword WELLOPEN;
• the keyword COMPLMPL;
• well limits on bottom hole gas liquid ratio (keyword WBHGLR);
• group reservoir volume injection rate control mode (keyword GCONINJE, param-
eter RESV);
• specification of well PVT region (11-th parameter of the keyword WELSPECS);
• calorific rate limit and natural gas liquid limit (NGL and CVAL) – parameters
18 and 20 of WCONPROD, parameter 12 of WCONHIST, WELTARG NGL,
WELTARG CVAL;
• recording of *.end-file, which contains the number of all errors/problems/warnings
in the model;
• editing of ROCKV keyword in EDIT section via arithmetic operations;
• the keyword MULTREGT in dual porosity models.
5. In MPI version the following options are supported:
• the keyword WCONINJP;
• the keyword GRUPNET;
• usage of maps MULTNUM, FLUXNUM, OPERNUM from previous sections in
arithmetic operations.

25. tNavigator 4.0.4 193

 20.1

25.2. Geology
In tNavigator 4.0.4 the following features are added to Geology module kernel:
• option of preparatory curve interpolation in multi-layer interpolation;
• 3D interpolation;
• calculations of Voronoi regions with radius specification (multi-layer and 3D);
• calculation of Cut (cube with values 0 and 1) according to well trajectories with radius
specification;
• calculation of Cut (cube with values 0 and 1) according to well perforations with radius
specification;
• calculation of SATNUM regions according to well data;
• calculation of connected components (via ACTNUM);
• export of "USER files" for GRID section
• possibility to create a geological project "tied" to existing dynamic model; after objects
editing the changes are saved in "USER files";
• function "block" for GRID section (in user arithmetic);
• the possibility to remove the calculation form the list in WORKFLOW.
In tNavigator 4.0.4 the following features are added to Geology module GUI:
• units visualization;
• optimization of maps and horizons visualization on 2D;
• an option "show mesh" for maps and horizons;
• smoothing option for contour lines;
• rulers with scale in 2D;
• a possibility to align the wells according to markers and depth on Well Section;
• an option to create and edit markers on Well Section; undo option;
• navigation buttons on 3D: a top view, side, bottom, etc.;
• translucency option for horizons on 3D;
• filters for 3D-meshes (I,J,K – filter and Cube Value Filter);
• a possibility to see the change of parameters for interactive 2D mesh modification;
• interactive cube editing in 3D (a brush);
• information windows with statistics for some objects.

25.2. Geology 194

 20.1

25.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.0.4 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added:

• Automatic conversion of relative permeabilities tables SWFN, SGFN and SOF3 to

Corey correlation (at user selection in GUI).

25.4. Remote GUI

In tNavigator 4.0.4 Remote Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• An option to see only the results on graphs without loading all model results.

25.5. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.0.4 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• User-customizable Graph Templates that allow:

– to make a quick selection of a set of graphs on the screen;

– to adjust color, thickness, and the names of the graph icons;
– to configure the type and color of the fonts;
– to configure the captions and units for graphs;
– to show several sets of graphs in one window;
– to export and import Graph Templates from the file.

• The possibility to compare graphs of any two models results (from all graphs loaded) in
the "Hist. vs Calc." Graph tab, and a more convenient menu.

• The possibility to use unique streamlines colors for different wells.

• Quick selection of displayed grid blocks on 3D map (selection of X, Y, Z layer numbers).

• An option to load only graphs from model results without loading maps.

25.3. Assisted History Matching 195

 20.1

26. tNavigator 4.0.3

26.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.0.3 kernel the following options are supported:

1. For thermal compositional models in E3 format:

• New Well control mode – Control by total molar rate target (parameter 14 of the
keyword WCONPROD).
• New Well control mode – Control by wet gas rate target (parameter 13 of the key-
word WCONPROD, parameter 11 of WCONHIST, option WGRA of the keyword
WELTARG).
• Calculation of friction for multisegment wells via correlation formulas (corre-
sponding parameters of keywords WELSEGS, COMPSEGS).

2. For thermal models in E3 format:

• New Well control mode – Control by steam rate target (parameter 15 of the key-
word WCONPROD, option STRA of the keyword WELTARG).
• Steam production rate limit for producers (parameter 15 of the keyword WCON-
PROD).
• Multicomponent gas injection.

3. For E1 format models the following options are supported:

• Calculation of friction for multisegment wells via correlation formulas (corre-

sponding parameters of keywords WELSEGS, COMPSEGS).
• Special formulas of inflow of gas from the completed grid blocks and the well
completions: R-G, P-P, GPP (parameter 8 of the keyword WELSPECS).
• Output of streamlines to binary files SLNSPEC, SLNxxxx (option –ecl-sln (for
console version) or from graphical interface).
• Secondary water cut limit for wells (parameters 11–12 of the keyword WECON).
• Switch off automatic compressors (the keyword COMPOFF).
• Removing and moving the wells in the well lists (keyword WLIST, operations
DEL and MOVE).
• ALQ specification in the keywords WCONHIST and WCONPROD.
• Specification of dependence of relative permeabilities end-points from temperature
(keywords ENPTVT, ENKRVT, ENPCVT).

4. For MO format models the following options are supported:

• Direct calculation in MPI version (without intermediate data conversion).

26. tNavigator 4.0.3 196

 20.1

• Recalculation of well bottom hole pressure at equivalent radius (keywords and

events PREX, P-RE).

5. In MPI version the following options are supported:

• MO-format models.
• Calculation of flows FLOWW, FLOWO, FLOWG, FLOWWZ, FLOWOZ,
FLOWGZ.
• Usage of COPYBOX in case in the copied blocks are equal.
• For GDFILE an amount of required RAM is reduced.

26.2. Geology
In tNavigator 4.0.3 Geology module the following features are added:

• Local interactive editing of 3D mesh.

• Local interactive editing of horizons.

• Local interpolation of cubes.

• Contour lines visualization for maps and horizons.

• Creation and editing of objects for PVT, RP, equilibrium.

• Creation of maps with Voronoi regions via markers.

• New arithmetic functions: INTERPOLATE_ML_TRIVIAL, INTERPOLATE_ML_IDW,

INTERPOLATE_ML_SGS, INTERPOLATE_ML_KRIGING.

• Logs visualization with cylinders in 3D.

• Creation and editing of palettes.

• Well section was improved.

• Geological project can be created form dynamic model. The following functions were
added:

– Loading of Inactive blocks.

– Loading of regions FIPNUM, SATNUM, EQLNUM, PVTNUM, ACTNUM.
– Loading of PVT, RP, equilibrium.

26.2. Geology 197

 20.1

26.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.0.3 Assisted History Matching module the following features are added:

• Automatic conversion of RP tables to Corey correlation (from GUI).

• Forecast objective function.

• An option to match BHP, THP and reservoir pressure.

• An option to load in history matching project models from another project.

Model queue was improved (calculations are started in separate processes, files backup on
timer was added).

26.4. Remote GUI

In tNavigator 4.0.3 Remote Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• Queue type can be specified in installation time. The following options are supported:

– LSF
– PBS/torque
– SGE (Sun Grid Engine)

• Old versions of PBS/torque are supported (below 2.3).

26.5. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.0.3 Graphical User Interface the following features are added:

• Export of gas field development data in tabular form.

• Support of FIPOWG keyword (E1/E3 – data format) in viewing results mode.

• An option to save and load model visualization settings templates (graph colors etc.).

• An option to use different colors instead of markers for loaded calculation results of
other models.

• An option of scaling for only one axis in the graphs.

• Dependence of 2D map scaling of the mouse position.

• For dual permeability models. An option to choose porosity system for connections in
Well properties dialogue.

• An option to export 2D maps including well trajectories data.

26.3. Assisted History Matching 198

 20.1

27. tNavigator 4.0.2

27.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.0.2 kernel the following options are supported:

1. For compositional models in E3 format:

• Compositional properties and EOS type for production system (surface condi-
tions) may be specified (keywords ACFS, BICS, EOSS, OMEGAAS, OMEGABS,
MWS, PCRITS, SSHIFTS, TCRITS, VCRITS, ZCRITS).
• Relative permeabilities and capillary pressure may depend on surface tension (key-
words PARACHOR, MISCIBLE, MISCNUM, MISCSTR, MISCEXP).
• The options for gas-oil capillary pressure treatment (keyword FORMOPTS) are
added.
• Relative permeabilities scaling with respect to composition (keywords ENKRVC,
ENPCVC, ENPTVC, EPSCOMP) is added.
• Resources for fluid-in-place regions may be calculated by taking into account the
separators (keywords FIELDSEP, FIPSEP).
• Model initialization by option NEI (keyword NEI) and 11th parameter of keyword
EQUIL is supported. Also, the support for 10th parameter EQUIL with values 2
and 3 is improved.
• LI critical temperature correlation is supported (keywords FACTLI, LILIM).
• The option NOMIX for oil and gas relative permeabilities near the critical point
added.
• The keyword WELLINJE is added to provide injection control data for a well.
• The keyword GRUPFUEL is added to specify the amount of gas produced from a
group that is burnt as a fuel, and thus cannot be used for re-injection.
• Gas plants are supported (keywords GPTABLE, GPTABLE3, 7th parameter of
keyword FIELDSEP, 8th parameter of keyword FIPSEP, 9th parameter of keyword
SEPCOND).
• Load and save for compositional properties specified in the section SUMMARY
are supported.
• Flash calculations are significantly accelerated for single-phase hydrocarbon re-
gions, load balancing for compositional property calculations is added.
• The support for multiple EOS and EQUIL regions is improved.
• Compositional models in MO format are supported.

2. For thermal compositional models in E3 format:

27. tNavigator 4.0.2 199

 20.1

• Relative permeability scaling with respect to composition (or temperature) can be

combined with the scaling specified in each grid block (5th parameter of keyword
ENDSCALE).
• K-values may be specified by the tables (keyword KVTABTn).

3. For E1 format models the following options are supported:

• Directional relative permeabilities including dual porosity case (parameters DI-

RECT and IRREVERS of keyword SATOPTS, keywords KRNUMX, KRNUMX-
, KRNUMY, KRNUMY-, KRNUMZ, KRNUMZ-, KRNUMMF, IMBNUMX,
IMBNUMX-, IMBNUMY, IMBNUMY-, IMBNUMZ, IMBNUMZ-, IMBNUMMF).
• Gravity drainage options for dual porosity (keywords GRAVDR, SIGMAGD, SIG-
MAGDV, GRAVDRM, DZMTRX, DZMTRXV).
• WAG process (keywords WCYCLE, WELLWAG).
• Gas lift optimization (keywords LIFTOPT, GLIFTOPT, WLIFTOPT, GLIFTLIM).
• Well prioritization option (keywords PRIORITY, GCONPRI).
• Assigning separators to groups (keywords GSEPCOND, SEPVALS).
• Economical limits for liquid (the 14th parameter of keyword WECON).
• The option to decrease guide rates oscillations due to rate-dependent conning phe-
nomena (9th parameter of keyword GUIDERAT) is supported.
• Automatic initialization of multiple FIP regions representing the original GAS,
OIL and WATER zones (keyword FIPOWG).
• Wetability alternation due to the accumulation of surfactant (keywords
SURFWNUM, SURFADDW, SURFADS, SURFROCK).
• The option to limit permeability multiplier increase for bright-water nano-polymer
models.

4. For MO format models the following options are supported:

• Compositional models including CO2 injection option.

• WAG process (keyword and event WWAG).
• The target limits for accumulated values (parameters COIL, CWAT, CGAS, CLIQ,
CWIN, CGIN).
• Well efficiency factor set by a keyword (keyword WWEF).

5. In MPI version the following options are supported:

• Numerical aquifers (keywords AQUNUM, AQUCON).

• TEMPerature option.
• API tracking option.

27.1. tNavigator kernel 200

 20.1

• BRINE option (keywords SALT, SALTVD etc).

• TRACER option (keywords TRACERS, AQANTRC etc.).
• SURFACT option.
• The keyword ADDZCORN.
• The keyword WELSOMIN.
• HYSTeresis option.
• The parameter IRREVERS of keyword ROCKCOMP.
• Average pressures WBP4, WBP5, WBP9 calculation in case pattern split between
nodes.
• The keyword ARITHMETIC.
• Non-neighbour connections (keyword NNC) between blocks located on different
nodes.
• The keywords SATNUM, PVTNUM in SCHEDULE section.
• The keyword WFRA.
• The export of FIPXXX maps into binary INIT file.
• The keyword PCSH (MO).
• Creation of files listed in option –touch-after in case of job termination.
• Well production and injection reports may be outputted on each computational
time step by log level set WELL LOW of keyword REPORTFILE.
• Per-node thread load balancing for properties computation.

27.2. Geology
In tNavigator 4.0.2 Geology module the following features are introduced:
• New window "tables" for view, edit, filter well objects in table form (markers, wells
profiles, perforations, production data, etc).

• "Workspace" save.

• Interpolation algorithms for maps and horizons:

– Simple, usual, universal kriging.

– Simple, usual, universal kriging with anisotropy support.
– Sequential Gauss simulation with anisotropy support.
– Least squares method.

• Layer by layer interpolation for 3D data:

– Simple, usual, universal kriging.

27.2. Geology 201

 20.1

– Simple, usual, universal kriging with anisotropy support.

– Sequential Gauss simulation with anisotropy support.
– Least squares method.

• SCHEDULE section creation for dynamic model.

• Well profile averaging for 3D grid blocks.

• Well profile creation by geology 3D data.

• Grid creation by several different properties layers.

• Arbitrary object delete is supported (markers, well profiles, perforations, well production
data, etc).

• Object loading from text files with table data with column selection (markers, well
survey, perforations, production data, etc).

• Edit and save parameters for object drawing.

• Windows management and navigation improved.

• Geology project may be created by existing dynamic model.

27.3. Assisted History Matching

In tNavigator 4.0.2 Assisted History Matching module the following features are introduced:

• Job ordering for local job queue can be changed.

• Local PC may be switch off after all jobs in local queue are finished (for Windows
only).

• Background data loading (very important for large number of variants).

• Well production target functions.

• The target function for sum of parameters.

• Well water or gas injection target functions.

• The support of Nelder-Mead algorithm.

• Well and group data is visualized in graphs, cross-plots, and histograms.

• History matching variables improved:

– Arithmetic expressions may be used as a variable definition as for variable usage.

– The variable type (floating point or integer) may be specified in data file.

27.3. Assisted History Matching 202

 20.1

• The cross-plots are improved:

– Arbitrary parameter may be used as X.

– Model data shown in cross-plots is coloured as corresponding experiment.
– The variables can be visualized on cross-plots.

• "Tornado" plots are improved.

27.4. Remote GUI

In tNavigator 4.0.2 Remote Graphical User Interface the following features are introduced:

• The default settings for client may be specified on a server. The settings are:

– default number of threads;

– default number of slots used in job queue;
– default queue name.

27.5. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 4.0.2 Graphical User Interface the following features are introduced:

• Conditional "if" statement is supported in arithmetic expressions for map editing.

• Dual porosity model support is improved (edit for maps in matrix and fracture, his-
tograms for maps in matrix and fracture, etc).

• PDF viewer for documentation may be specified in settings.

27.4. Remote GUI 203

 20.1

28. tNavigator 4.0.1

28.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.0.1 kernel the following options are supported:

1. For compositional models E3 format the following functionality is added:

• Restart both the console and GUI versions.

• View the calculation results of compositional models during computation on a
cluster.
• Multiple EOS regions.
• Speed of compositional calculation was increased.
• Algorithms for determining the phase composition near the critical point was im-
proved.
• Compatibility with other simulators in flash calculations and phase identification
was improved.
• Parameters of VFP tables specific for compositional models.
• D-factor in the formula of inflow to well for compositional models.

2. For E1 format models the following options are supported:

• Hysteresis of relative permeabilities.

• The API Tracking option: mixing of different types of oil, having different surface
densities and PVT.
• Multiphase injection (option MULTI for the 3rd parameter of the keywords
WCONINJE, WCONINJH, WCONINJP).
• Option UDQ in the keyword ACTIONW.
• Options LIFT and GUID for 2nd parameter of the keywords WTMULT and
WELTARG.
• "Standard" network (keywords GNETPUMP, GRUPNET; previously only
"Extended" NETWORK option was supported).
• Reference depth for well block average pressure calculation (WPAVEDEP).
• The dependence between well PI multiplier versus maximum water cut (keywords
PIMULTAB and WPITAB).
• Group controls for different phases for one well group (parameters 3, 4, 5 of the
keyword WGRUPCON).
• LGR models: geometry inside local grid refinement (via COORD/ZCORN and
TOPS/DX/DY/DZ).

28. tNavigator 4.0.1 204

 20.1

• Options for calculation of the transmissibility between the regions (5th parameter
of the keyword MULTREGT).
• Grid in binary format for models with LGR (keyword GDFILE for models with
LGR).
• Keyword NNCGEN.
• The calculation of transmissibility for the value ALL 5th parameter of the keyword
PINCH was improved.
• Options of the command line –touch-before, –touch-after to create files (specified
by user) before of after calculation.

3. For MO format models the following options are supported:

• VFP tables specification.

• User-files in E1 format are possible in MO format models (for example, to set the
proppant properties tables or automatic hydraulic fracture).
• FIELD units.

4. In MPI version the following options are supported:

• Restart for compositional models.

• Hysteresis of relative permeabilities.
• Output of PLT binary files (keywords WRFT, WRFTPLT).
• Output of binary files, managed via the keyword OUTSOL in SCHEDULE section.
• Output of a set of vectors for the keyword ALL in section SUMMARY.
• Option STORE of the keyword ROCKOPTS.
• Option SMARTMB of the keyword RUNCTRL.
• An automatic restart from the beginning of reporting step with the minimum initial
time step, if the calculation for one reason or another has not converged.

28.2. Geology
In Geology module the following new functionality was added:
• Calculator of all objects.

• The history of the objects. Tool to recalculate objects with different parameters.

• The well profile with an ability to edit markers.

• A tool for creating and editing of the coordinate system (is used for the grid construc-
tion).

• Taking into account a polygon (for example, the license block) in the grid construction.

28.2. Geology 205

 20.1

• A tool for creating and editing of polygons.

• A tool for creating and starting the model (sections RUNSPEC, GRID, PROPS (with
correlation), SOLUTION).
• Information window (calculation details).

28.3. Assisted History Matching

In Assisted History Matching module the following new functionality was added:
• An ability to work with integer variables in history matching.
• An algorithm of relative permeabilities history matching (Corey correlation).
• Option "Connect to the model" (view results for models that are calculating at this time).
• For any variant of history matching project the table "Variant Info" is enable (double
click on the variant in the option Project Info). Table can be exported to html.

28.4. Remote GUI

In Remote Graphical User Interface the following options were added:
• The design of the main window was modified: an ability to configure location and form
of tools.
• Now one can add a variety of models, including specification of the directory where
tNavigator searches all data files.
• An ability to load configuration of running processes from the server.

28.5. Graphical User Interface

In Graphical User Interface the following options were added:
• Graphs of component production for compositional models.
• An ability to load results of the model that in calculated at this moment.
• LGR blocks are displayed via grey color at the map of roof.
• 2D maps of sum, average, rms, ... : LGR blocks borders are displayed as dotted line.
• An ability to display the time steps with a precision better than days (hours, minutes).
• An ability to customize the accuracy of the numbers in the tables for graphs.
• The symmetric logarithmic palette for maps with positive and negative values.
• An ability to visualize crossplots for regions for historical and calculated graphs simul-
taneously.

28.3. Assisted History Matching 206

 20.1

29. tNavigator 4.0.0

29.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 4.0.0 kernel the following functionality is supported:

1. Compositional models in E3 format are supported:

• the standard set of options for compositional modeling is supported (except for an
injection of CO2);
• calculation of compositional models is supported in the cluster (MPI) version;
• for compositional models in the GUI all visualization options are added.

2. "Black oil" models calculation in IM format is supported.

3. New module – geology modeling – is added:

• loading trajectories, markers, LOGs, horizons;

• creation of horizons by markers;
• creation of mesh by horizons;
• interpolation of cubes from LOGs (via the formula) (creation of cubes: net-to-gross
ratio, porosity, permeability);
• export of mesh and cubes into a corner point geometry format (COORD/ZCORN);
• saving of log of all data operations;
• 2D and 3D visualization of all data.

This module allows to create a geological and dynamic model using a primary processed
information in a single interface.

4. New module – Assisted History Matching module – is added (this module is based on
Experiment designer):

• Optimization algorithm (differential evolution) was added. This algorithm allows

to minimize the mismatch in the adaptation in automatic mode, via changing of
parameter values.
• Construction of user-defined objective function (weighted sum of residuals) in
GUI. The objective function can be constructed for any group of wells in basic
model. Oil, water, liquid, gas (rate or total), watercut or gas-oil ratio can be used.
• New algorithm (creation of model variants) can be run from previously created
initial approximation (model variant) in the History Matching window. Variants
generated by different algorithms are compared in a single window.
• A new algorithm for estimating the sensitivity is added – tornado experiment,
which allows to make a tornado diagram.

29. tNavigator 4.0.0 207

 20.1

• Assisted History Matching for E1 and MO data models. "Manual" specification of

variables for E1 format models (the keyword DEFINES) and MO format model
(the keyword VDEF).
• Variables for history matching can be specified in GUI (history matching of WOC,
GOC).
• Saving of History Matching Project (the state of History Matching data) to the file
which is portable between computers and operating systems.
• The integration of the model queue to a remote task queue on the cluster.

5. Remote GUI (graphical interface) module is added. This module allows the user to do
the following things from his workstation (running under Windows or Linux):

• put a model in a queue for the calculation on remote cluster;

• delete a model from the queue;
• view the status of the queue;
• view the status of the calculation (progress and calculation log);
• connect to the current calculation and visualize the calculation results.

In fact, this module makes the calculation on the remote cluster the same convenient, as
well as the calculation on the local computer.

6. For models in E1 format the following keywords are supported: JFUNCR, GSATPROD,
GSATINJE, GCONSUMP, WELPI, RPTRST (options FREQ and BASIC).

7. For models in MO format the following keywords are supported: DPOR, DPER, DPSS,
LOCAtion, ZONE. Dual porosity is supported for models in MO format. Splitting and
merging of MO format models is supported.

8. For models in MO format the new possibility to add a hydraulic fracture is added: a
table with events (new tNavigator keyword – WFRP – is analogous to the keyword
WFRACP for models in MO format).

9. A possibility to specify the relative permeabilities tables with Corey correlations via the
keywords COREYWO and COREYGO.

10. Support of options in MPI version is improved:

• dual porosity and dual permeability models are supported;

• restart is supported;
• saving of UNRST/UNSMRY binary files is supported;
• the continuation of the calculation from the last calculated step is supported;
• compositional and temperature models are supported.

29.1. tNavigator kernel 208

 20.1

11. The possibility to open on another computer the results of calculation, that goes on the
cluster, if the model is calculated on the shared disk.

12. The GUI can be used to view the results of calculated models without a full license
(GUI may have it separate licensing).

29.2. Graphical User Interface

The GUI version of tNavigator 4.0.0 has the visualization of new physical models and new
modules:

• Compositional model;

• Geology;

• Assisted History Matching;

• Remote GUI.

The following functions are added:

1. For User maps and User Cuts: the calculator is added. Calculator buttons are names of
available maps and available operations with them. For 2D map Layer selection of any
area with "brush" can be used. Calculator simplifies the work with User Arithmetic.

2. A possibility to enter the injected tracer name and its concentration in the GUI in the
Well Properties dialogue.

3. A possibility to enter the economic limits for wells in GUI in the Well Properties
dialogue.

4. The interface for perforating the well along it’s trajectory is improved.

5. The interface for tracer graphs is improved.

6. A possibility to use the economic parameters (enter in GUI tax values, cost of operation,
new drilling, geological and technological procedures).

7. A possibility to create a well trajectory on Cross-Section.

8. Dynamic creation of WELL LIST in GUI. Visualization in GUI of WELL LIST that are
specified in model files and in GUI.

9. Binaries converter (from binary files to text files) is added.

29.2. Graphical User Interface 209

 20.1

30. tNavigator 3.3.4

30.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 3.3.4 kernel the following functionality is supported:
1. Work with dual porosity models has been improved:
• local grid refinement (LGR) for dual porosity models is supported;
• arrays in EDIT-section can be changed for dual porosity models.
2. Work with models with a large number of inactive blocks has been improved:
• Loading models with a large number of inactive blocks is accelerated;
• Restart models with a large number of inactive blocks is supported.
3. Splitting a large model into small sectors has been improved:
• Splitting models with a large number of inactive blocks is supported;
• Splitting models with group control is supported.
4. MPI version options are upgraded:
• keyword ACTION can be used with a limited amount of stored information;
• option CHECKSAT of the keyword RUNCTRL;
• a single run of calculations provides splitting of a large model into sectors and
calculation of the boundary conditions;
• restart of regular version with the calculation of MPI version.
5. Support fo numerical aquifers has been improved.
6. The second parameter of the keyword GRIDUNIT (E1).
7. New Interpolation method has been added – multilayer and 3-dimensional Sequential
Gauss Simulation.
8. Protection from damage of result files was added in the case when one model is opened
simultaneously by multiple instances of tNavigator, including on the shared disk.
9. New elements of the automatic adaptation:
• Experiments designer. Creation of the different model variants with different vari-
able values modified by one of the following algorithms: Grid Search or Latin
hypercube.
• Sensitivity analysis tool: Pearson correlation between the model variables and the
values of parameter mismatch.
10. The model queue. The opportunity to send a notice to e-mail when the model calculation
is finished.

30. tNavigator 3.3.4 210

 20.1

30.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 3.3.4 Graphical User Interface the following functionality is supported:

1. To support the functions of Experiments designer the list of functions to compare the
results for the queue models is enlarged. The following features were added:

• Graph of difference between the calculated and historical values.

• Values Crossplot for selected calculated models.
• Export to a text file for histograms, graphs and tables.
• Sorting of the selected models.
• Deleting of non-selected models.
• Mark the selected models in the table of values and residuals for copying to the
clipboard.
• Selecting displayed columns in tables of values and residuals.
• Hiding parameters with the same values in the tables and histograms.
• Ability to set the historical values from the selected model to calculate the residuals
and compare results.

2. The functionality of cross-sections has been upgraded:

• Cross-sections can be made through a fence, specified via individual points, hori-
zontal well or several wells.
• Map Editing. the possibility to edit map inside or outside the cross-section (analo-
gously to the profiles).
• Cross-section through the well can be made: through the centers of blocks with
connections or through the trajectory branch. Smoothing (reducing the number of
trajectory points) with the selected precision can be done.
• Cross-section through the several wells. Wells can be chosen from the Well filter
or Well selection. Wells order can be changed in the list. Cross-section can be
made through well top, bottom or middle part.

30.2. Graphical User Interface 211

 20.1

31. tNavigator 3.3.3

31.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 3.3.3 kernel the following functionality is supported:

1. Calculation of dual porosity (and dual permeability) model is modified, working with
these models is accelerated.

2. Artificial Lift Quantity (ALQ) is supported in lifting-tables and in well control modes
(E1).

3. 3rd parameter of WEFAC (E1).

4. Cross-flow blockage (ALLX) in MO models.

5. LGR in MO models.

6. LGR in values interpolation into crosshole space.

7. Values interpolation into crosshole space is accelerated (for Multilayer Geostatistical

(Kriging) interpolation Type).

8. Map Editing. In Multilayer Determined interpolation a new parameter "Radius" is added.

Radius has influence on smoothing near well.

9. Map Editing. Connected Components and Voronoi Diagrams are added.

31.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 3.3.3 Graphical User Interface the following functionality is supported:

1. Calculation of historical data is done when model is open, so model loading is acceler-
ated.

2. Graphs. Well list. Historical or calculated well status is shown.

3. Playback results function is added.

4. Automatic creation of screenshots for several time steps.

5. Acceleration of 2D and 3D maps for large models.

6. User Interface for dual porosity and dual permeability models is updated.

7. Automatic selecting of integer layers for Contour lines. Previous behaviour (uniform
partition of the range of values into intervals) can be chosen in Preferences. Visualiza-
tion.

31. tNavigator 3.3.3 212

 20.1

8. Loading of User contours for profiles.

9. Improved navigation of logs (Option "Find" is added).

10. User Arithmetic description is updated. Option "Find" is added.

11. Models queue is changed:

• models queue is in the new window (queue status is saved);

• one can make several models queues and choose one to work with;
• historical values visualization for models from queue and residual histograms for
calculated models;
• visualization of values for calculated models at any time step.

31.2. Graphical User Interface 213

 20.1

32. tNavigator 3.3.2

32.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 3.3.2 kernel the following functionality is supported:

1. Option NETWORK is enlarged (E1): compressors, booster compressor station, water

discharge at the network nodes.

2. Separators are supported (E1).

3. Boundary conditions record for model splitting have been updated.

4. ROFF format for initial grid data is supported.

32.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 3.3.2 Graphical User Interface the following functionality is supported:

1. Adding well is via Alt+Click (earlier – Ctrl+Click). Commands "Show Block Info
(graphs)" and "Add well" have different control sequences.

2. Selecting of nearest to the mouse well on 2D map.

3. Visualization of well groups and wells in these groups (for all graphs).

32. tNavigator 3.3.2 214

 20.1

33. tNavigator 3.3.1

33.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 3.3.1 kernel the following functionality is supported:

1. Increased support for open models with a large number of inactive blocks: multireservoir
models are supported, splitting of such models is supported and boundary conditions
creation.

2. Saving and splitting of multireservoir models.

3. Calculations of the split patterns in MPI-version.

4. The ability to write the boundary conditions without opening .patterns-model.

5. The drawdown limit can be taken into account when calculating the well’s production
potential (WELDRAW, item 4) (E1).

6. The maximum drawdown within the set of connection grid blocks (WELDRAW, item 5)
(E1).

7. Group reservoir fluid volume production rate control (GCONPROD RESV) (E1).

8. The keyword GEFAC (E1).

9. COMPDAT AUTO – connection is initially closed. It will be opened automatically when

another well connection is closed during an automatic workover. A connection on AUTO
is opened each time the well is worked over, in the order in which the connections are
first defined in COMPDAT. (E1).

10. Prioritized drilling queue. Sequential drilling queue (keywords WDRILTIM (item 1-2),
WDRILPRI (item 1-2), DRILPRI (item 1-9)) (E1).

11. Removed the generation of files EGRID, INIT, UNRST when using the option-d (E1).

12. Algorithm of evenly balancing the allocated memory between the NUMA nodes was
improved, calculations on systems with NUMA architecture was accelerated.

13. Added a section of a hybrid time-dependent data in the hybrid model. (model E1 + MO
time-dependent data + additional time-dependent data E1).

14. Models MO with temperature option.

33. tNavigator 3.3.1 215

 20.1

33.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 3.3.1 Graphical User Interface the following functionality is supported:

1. New visualization of Well section (Well profile) and LAS files.

2. Interpolation on 3D maps:

2.1. geostatistical interpolation (kriging)

2.2. determined method (least square method)

3. A simplified way to create perforations filters in layers is added.

4. A possibility to create compact window with graphs for selected parameters.

5. A possibility to create a well filter via selecting wells on a 2D map.

6. Synchronization of well filters for all windows.

7. A possibiity to delete well filter.

8. In model statistics, the model values are now written with the factors (thousand, million).

9. An acceleration of the interface with large models.

10. A possibility to create a filter (cut) for faults.

33.2. Graphical User Interface 216

 20.1

34. tNavigator 3.3.0

34.1. tNavigator kernel
In tNavigator 3.3.0 kernel the following functionality is supported:

1. Dual porosity and dual permeability (E1) is supported in calculations and in graphical
interface (in tracers calculations, salts, polymers, temperature option).

2. Option to limit the rate of inverse gas dissolution is supported (DRSDT).

3. Number of supported parameters in the following keywords increased (E1): WELDRAW,

WECON, WECONINJ, GECON, PPCWMAX, GPMAINT, WCUTBACK, GCONINJE,
GCONPROD.

4. Multiple group controls is supported (E1, MO).

5. The keyword WFRAC is supported for MO models; and its expansions (for example
FLOWFUNC) that was supported earlier only for E1 models.

6. Restart for MO models is supported.

7. Support of unit systems has been improfed (FIELD, METRIC), also in user arithmetic
(E1, MO).

8. Section SUMMARY for E1 models is supported: when one orders export of results to
binary files E1 (UNRSMRY) they are saved in accordance with the specified in the
section SUMMARY fields. Graphical interface to choose export fields has been added.

9. The keywords OUTSOL and RPTRST for E1 models are supported: when one orders
export of results to binary files E1 (UNRST) they are saved in accordance with the
specified in the keywords fields. Graphical interface to choose export maps has been
added.

10. In the keyword GDFILE in addition to the binary grid format EGRID mesh GRID (E1)
are supported.

11. Hybrid model mode: up to section of non-stationary data it has the format E1, the section
describing the trajectories, events, well data has the format MO.

12. In Surfactant model adsorption is taken into account (E1).

13. In polymer model Bright Water temperature option is taken into account.

14. Faster calculation of the historical data while loading model (E1, MO).

15. Temperature option is expanded beyond E1: a) heat capacity of blocks with non ac-
tive blocks can taken into account in temperature calculations, b) one can set the heat
exchange with the environment (top and bottom layer).

34. tNavigator 3.3.0 217

 20.1

16. The ability to write concise event of perforation, while saving the model (in demand by
splitting-merging the model and the desire to further manual editing) (E1).

17. Dates to 1900 year are supported (E1, MO).

18. To reduce the amount of data (written to disk) the file containing flows between the FIP
regions is generated only by user request (E1, MO).

19. First implementation of geomechanical option.

20. Default values in the input maps are supported.

21. For the cluster version: support for GDFILE, multi-reservoir models, all types of group
control, an optional recording of the entire set of results files (E1).

22. For the console version (including cluster version): an explicit entering from the com-
mand line a set of results files that will be generated. For example, one can specify a
record of results for groups and wells to reduce the amount of required disk space and
to reduce time. Generated graphics then can be viewed in a graphical interface.

23. For the console version (including cluster version): command line option –thread-bind-
to-cpu to explicitly specify the binding of threads to logical processors.

24. Improvements in balancing between the NUMA nodes used by the program RAM.

25. Improvements in the use of CPU cache.

26. Speed of calculation of sector models with boundary conditions was significantly in-
creased (FLUX).

27. Different options in calculating the local grid refinement (LGR) were supported (nested
LGR, options PINCH, streamlines).

28. Improvements in the calculation of the initial equilibrium (a significant acceleration in

some cases; transit zone and the accuracy of equilibrium are supported, etc.).

34.2. Graphical User Interface

In tNavigator 3.3.0 Graphical User Interface the following functionality is supported:

1. An ability to read only the time-dependent model data (schedule data) for E1, MO
models, hybrid format. This can highly speed up adaptation work, if only wells and
perforations data was changed.

2. Local mesh refinement (LGR) is supported in all parts of the GUI: 2D and 3D maps,
contour lines, in user arithmetic, editing maps, adding new wells.

3. Adding perforations dialog can use the trajectories. Now, if the well trajectory is loaded,
the perforations can be added in format "from – to" in TVD or MD (E1, MO).

34.2. Graphical User Interface 218

 20.1

4. An ability to additional loading well data and storing it in a table-text format (similar to
MO format).

5. A map of the ternary diagram for saturations.

6. If the map Cut is enable, then by selecting the "Wells" shows the sum of all perforations,
selected by this Cut.

7. An ability to rename profiles and well filters. So profile name is used now instead of
profile number.

8. In User Arithmetic expressions one can use relative permeabilities scaling, even if they
have not been explicitly defined (E1, MO), and maps of aquifers connections.

9. Setting to control the accuracy of signatures to the isolines.

10. Loading cubes from files .grdecl format was improved (now one can download the data
inside the BOX / ENDBOX structure).

11. Maps of minimum and maximum for 2D maps.

12. Creation of well filter, taking into account the Unified Adaptation Results table.

13. An ability to sort the wells using Unified Adaptation Results table data.

14. An ability to assign a name for the Annual Summary Report.

15. Visualization of ROCKTAB (E1), KVSP (MO) data.

16. Visualization of vector fields for the geomechanical option.

17. An ability to save a picture of map or graph to the clipboard by pressing the camera
button.

18. An ability to import well filters from the clipboard.

19. Factors (thousand, million) in tables and graphs are now the same for the graphs on the
same axis.

34.2. Graphical User Interface 219

 Rock Flow Dynamics

Phone: +1 713-337-4450
Fax: +1 713-337-4454
Address: 2200 Post Oak Boulevard, STE 1260, Houston, TX 77056
E-mail: [email protected]
Web: http://rfdyn.com

To locate the office nearest to you, please visit https://rfdyn.com/contact/

© Rock Flow Dynamics. All rights reserved. 03.04.2020